JP2020120719A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To execute a predetermined performance in accordance with a game situation.SOLUTION: When a first condition (e.g., a push button 31B is operated once to six times) is satisfied, a predetermined performance can be executed in a first suggestion mode (e.g., mini-character suggestion performances A to F). When a second condition (e.g., the push button 31B is operated seven times) is satisfied based on detection by detection means after the first condition is satisfied when the determination means determines that a special condition is satisfied, a predetermined performance can be executed in a second suggestion mode (e.g., a mini-character suggestion performance G). When the determination means determines that the special condition is satisfied, the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, a predetermined performance is executed in the first suggestion mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-24

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into the game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result on the variable display device, the gaming state (game Therefore, there is a machine configured so as to give a predetermined game value to the player (a so-called pachinko machine) by changing the state of the machine.

Also, after setting a predetermined number of bets on a predetermined game medium for one game, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each variable. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing, and the variable display of all variable display devices is performed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium predetermined according to the prize is paid out, and when a specific prize is generated, the game state is given a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (the so-called slot machine).

In addition, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is advantageous for the player who can easily win the ball, or is advantageous for the player. That is, the right is generated and the condition for paying out the prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started on the variable display device based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening. When it is done, "big hit" occurs. The derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses even if the number of prizes does not reach a predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. Also, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined time, and stop and shake in a state of being consistent with a specific display result. It is possible that big hits occur before the final result is displayed, because it is moving, scaling or deforming, or multiple symbols fluctuate in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state in which the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the variable display device is not the specific display result, the result is "disappear", and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that display control of an effect based on a set value is performed and a process of displaying each character image of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is executed at a predetermined timing.

JP, 2010-200902, A (paragraph 0085, Drawing 12).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the predetermined effect is executed in response to the satisfaction of the condition based on the detection of the motion of the player, the specific condition is not satisfied. If the predetermined effect is executed according to the specific suggestion mode, the effect may give a feeling of good race, which may rather reduce the interest.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect in accordance with a game situation.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of set values (for example, the set value "1 Based on the detection means (for example, the push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and the detection means. Then, a predetermined effect (for example, steps 047 IWS409 to S411, S806 to S834 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character suggestion effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes. Condition determining means for determining whether or not a part to be executed) and a special condition (for example, having decided to execute the mini character suggestion effect G) (for example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 executing step 047IWS827). And a first suggestion mode (for example, a mini-character suggestion effect A to F) that suggests which setting value among the plurality of setting values, and the specification mode among the plurality of setting values. And a second suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect G) that indicates that the preset effect value is set to the set value (for example, the set value "6"), the predetermined effect executing means is based on the detection by the detecting means. When the first condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated once to six times) is satisfied, the predetermined effect can be executed in the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes steps 047IWS809 to S825). When the special condition is satisfied by the condition determining means, the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is pressed seven times) based on the detection by the detecting means after the first condition is satisfied. When the operation is established, the predetermined effect can be executed by the second suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 047IWS826 to S828), and the special condition is satisfied by the condition determining unit. When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed according to the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS826). By doing so, even if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is decided, unless the seventh push button 31B is pressed, the seventh mini character image 047IW0 is displayed. 03 is not deleted, the mini character image 047IW003 remains displayed in two states), and variable display is executed based on the start condition being satisfied, and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values) are set. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) having a different probability of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) depending on which one of the values 1 to 6) is set. ), and storage means for storing set value information for specifying the set value (for example, RAM 102), and determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the start condition. (For example, CPU 103), numerical data extracting means (for example, CPU 103) for extracting numerical data (for example, MR1) for determining whether or not the determining means controls in an advantageous state, and before determining for the determining means. , An advantageous state is controlled based on the numerical data (for example, MR1) extracted by the numerical data extraction means and a judgment value (for example, a hit/miss judgment table) set according to the set value information stored in the storage means. A determination means (for example, CPU 103) for determining whether or not the setting value information stored in the storage means is specified when determining whether or not the determination means is controlled to an advantageous state, A judgment value is set according to the specified set value information, and it is controlled to the advantageous state when it is determined whether or not the advantageous condition is controlled before the start condition is satisfied and when the start condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that a common determination process is executed (for example, the same win/fail judgment module is executed in 92FS002 in FIG. 12A and 92FS028 in FIG. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the game situation. Further, it is possible to preferably perform the determination of the advantageous state when determining the advantageous state in the gaming machine in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set.

(Means 2) In the means 1, an effective period notification effect capable of executing an effective period notification effect (for example, operation promotion display) for informing that the detection by the detection means is an effective detection effective period (for example, an operation effective period) Equipped with an execution unit (for example, a portion that executes step 047IWS841 in the CPU 120 for effect control), the effective period notification effect execution unit does not execute the effective period notification effect for the detection effective period of the predetermined effect (for example, a mini character suggestion effect). Then, the operation promotion display is not displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has performed the operation by noticing that it is the detection effective period of the predetermined effect.

(Means 3) Special state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a probability variation state) that is easily controlled to the advantageous state by the means 1 or the means 2 (Specifically, the CPU 103) includes a portion that executes step S117 to execute processing for performing setting for starting the probability variation control), and the predetermined effect executing means has a predetermined value when the special state is controlled. The execution of the effect may be restricted (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the step 047IWS603 to execute the mini character suggestion effect only when not in the probable state). According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on being controlled in a special state.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is re-executed a predetermined number of times. Re-variable display execution means that can be executed (for example, can execute pseudo rendition) (for example, a portion of the process control CPU 120 that selects a process table including pseudo rendition in step 047IWS412 and executes steps 047IWS414 and S805). For each re-variable display, the condition established based on the detection by the detection unit including the first condition and the second condition can be initialized (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS834 to re-variate. The value of the operation counter may be reset every time). According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest for the predetermined effect.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is re-executed a predetermined number of times. Re-variable display execution means that can be executed (for example, can execute pseudo rendition) (for example, a portion of the process control CPU 120 that selects a process table including pseudo rendition in step 047IWS412 and executes steps 047IWS414 and S805). According to the number of times of the re-variable display, the predetermined effect according to the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode can be executed at different ratios (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS617). Thus, in the pseudo-players, there is no case where a mini character suggesting effect having a lower accuracy than the mini character suggesting effect executed in the previous change is executed in a later change). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player an incentive to perform an operation for each revariable display.

(Means 6) Special effect execution capable of executing a special effect (for example, telop suggestion effect) different from the predetermined effect by suggesting which setting value is set by any one of the means 1 to 5 Means (for example, a portion of the CPU 120 for effect control that selects a process table including the telop suggestion effect in step 047IWS412 and executes steps 047IWS414 and S805), the predetermined effect execution means is a variable display in which the special effect is executed. , At least restricting the execution of the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120, when Y in steps 047IWS605 and S611, selects the limiting mini character suggestion effect determination table in steps 047IWS607 and S615, and executes the step. 047 IWS 608 and S616 are executed (see FIG. 8-20 ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to restrict execution of an effect with excessively high accuracy as an effect that suggests which set value.

Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions relating to gaming machines of means 7 to 13 described below. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, variable display is executed on the basis of satisfaction of a start condition as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, and any one of a plurality of setting values is set. The probability of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is different depending on whether it has been set, and it is possible to set it to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting change operation, On the basis of this, there has been one that can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in the relationship between the determination value of the advantageous state according to the set value and the setting value of a plurality of steps, when determining the advantageous state, how to determine the advantageous state In consideration of this point, it is demanded to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably determining the advantageous state.

(Means 7) The variable display is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the player is set according to which of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) is set. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for, and storing means (for example, pachinko gaming machine) that stores setting value information for specifying a setting value. , RAM 102), a determination means (for example, CPU 103) that determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and a determination means that determines whether or not the determination means controls to the advantageous state. Numerical data extraction means (for example, CPU 103) for extracting the numerical data (for example, MR1), numerical data (for example, MR1) extracted by the numerical data extraction means before the determination means is stored in the storage means. The determination means (for example, the CPU 103) for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled based on the determination value (for example, the hit/miss determination table) set according to the set value information Before determining whether the start condition is satisfied, the setting value information stored in the storage unit is specified when determining whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and the determination value is set according to the specified setting value information. Common determination processing is performed when it is determined whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state and when it is determined whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state when the start condition is satisfied (for example, in FIG. The same win/fail judgment module is executed in 92FS002 of 12-1 and 92FS028 of FIG. 12-2).

With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the determination of the advantageous state when determining the advantageous state in the gaming machine in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set.

(Means 8) In the means 7, the range of the judgment value judged by the judgment means is set to a range of the judgment value from a predetermined reference value (for example, 1020 as shown in FIG. 12-3), and the predetermined reference value is , Regardless of the setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-3A, the reference value is 1020 and is common regardless of the setting value).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when determining the advantageous state.

(Means 9) In the means 7 or 8, the collating means for collating whether or not the stored setting value information is the same as the previous setting value information for every predetermined period (for example, in 92FS050 of FIG. 12-4). As shown, each time the hit/miss judgment module is executed, a set value information matching judgment is made to judge whether or not the set value information this time is the same as the set value information at the time of the previous hit judgment).

With such a configuration, the accuracy of the setting value information can be guaranteed.

(Means 10) In the means 9, the collation means performs collation each time it determines whether or not the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is numerical data controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the numerical data MR1. The setting value information is collated each time the win/fail judgment module for judging whether or not the numerical data of is numerical data controlled in the jackpot gaming state).

With such a configuration, the accuracy of the setting value information can be guaranteed.

(Means 11) In the means 9 or 10, the error notification means capable of executing error notification based on the fact that the setting value information collated by the collating means is different from the stored setting value information (for example, FIG. 12). -4 92FS055, an error that transmits a command capable of specifying the setting value abnormality error information from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and notifies the effect that the set value is abnormal on the effect control board 12 side. Error-related processing such as processing for displaying information) is further provided.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the accuracy of the setting value information by notifying by error notification that the setting value information is inaccurate.

(Means 12) In the means 11, a game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Further, the production control means controls to execute error notification to the error notification means based on the transmission of the abnormal set value information from the game control means (for example, setting value abnormal error information is specified. A possible command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the effect control board 12 executes an error-related process such as a process of displaying error information notifying that the set value is abnormal), The game control means sets a game stopped state in which the game cannot be continued based on the abnormal setting value information (for example, on the main board 11 side, as shown in 92FS056 of FIG. 12-4, the continuation of the game is unsuccessful). Possible game stop state).

According to such a configuration, since the advantageous state is not determined based on the abnormal set value information, the fairness of the game can be ensured.

(Means 13) In any one of the means 7 to 12, a special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) is further provided, and the special state is provided. The range of the judgment value of the numerical data controlled by is constant regardless of the set value (for example, the range of the judgment value of the numerical data controlled by the small hitting gaming state is constant regardless of the set value), the judgment The means determines whether or not there is numerical data controlled in a special state within a range of a certain judgment value (for example, the CPU 103 has numerical data controlled in a small hitting gaming state within a range of a certain judgment value). Determine if there is).

According to such a configuration, the processing at the time of determining the special state can be shared regardless of the set value, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for each set value. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 047IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 047IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 047IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol normal process. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change suggestion production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a setting change suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting suggestion production setting processing. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of a telop suggestive effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini character suggestion production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of notice production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a blackout notice production determination table and a button notice production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change suggestion notification process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the normal variable display of a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of setting change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of setting change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of a mini character suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production aspect of a mini character suggestive production. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at the time of cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a setting error error or when the power is restored during a setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during the setting change process, and (B) is the occurrence of the set value error, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. 9 is a flowchart showing a setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command in the characteristic part 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 40F. It is a flow chart which shows sub side game stop processing in characteristic part 40F. It is a flowchart showing an example of a random number determination process at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows the judgment value range of the random number for special figure display result judgment. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of processing of a hit/miss determination module which is executed by 92FS002 of FIG. 12A and 92FS028 of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing of a success/failure judgment module by characteristic part 093F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. In addition, the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols that are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols that are variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and a special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended, and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first number of reserved memories, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

The variable winning a prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole which changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are provided. Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the tilted position of the movable wing piece (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When the game balls enter the second starting winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the on state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, the winning of the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays the normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending storages, which is the number of universal figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning a prize ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

It should be noted that, when the game ball enters (start winning) the starting winning opening during the period during which the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (a start prize has occurred, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) is displayed as a stop special symbol, the "big hit" symbol is given, and the jackpot symbol is given. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Also, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, "missing symbol" is generated.

After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" category is set. For example, you can prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit gaming state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc., below), and according to these, a big hit. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. Note that, similar to the big hit type, the "small hit" may be provided with a small hit type.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time saving state, the average time to change the figure (the period during which the figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game is improved compared to the normal state. The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which it is likely to be a "big hit" in addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability changing state continue until any one of the end conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cutting (shortening of times of cutting, probability change of times of cutting, etc.).

The normal state is a game state other than the special state such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is a "big hit", etc., the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on as in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same manner as when the processing was not executed).

A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate and low base state is also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing at which the display result (also called the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination described later, the decorative design not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which is continued.

Further, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) being a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are displayed together and stopped, and after the jackpot gaming state is terminated, it is changed to the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation pattern, and the even-numbered decorative pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, the fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5” etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state) and when "small hit". The common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”) (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative design may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit midfield effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit midfield effect, an effect that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion effect that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. Incidentally, during the small hit game state, some big hit type (big hit type of big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, big hit type that makes the subsequent game state a highly accurate state) big hit game By executing a common effect in the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-precision state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (the game ball passes or the game ball passes from the various switches (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting the gaming ball A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when it enters is transmitted) and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), a game status (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), command for specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). (Including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of effect based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies the lighting/extinguishing state of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on/off the lamp (supply of sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, for example. And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

When the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, a backup flag state, and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). In accordance with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start information (start Data such as the number of times of winning) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. See below).

Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the management of execution and suspension of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “universal hit”. The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of held memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of the starting winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting a production control command corresponding to each process to the production control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in correspondence with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". Includes processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether there is reach, etc.), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B, and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, stop display (deriving) the fixed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", when the game is controlled to the time saving state or the probability changing state, and when the cut-out is completed, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening preprocessing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on that the display result is "big hit" Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and the upper limit number of times of round execution are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process of opening the big hit ends.

The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation that notifies the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on that the display result is "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

The small hitting open process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation for informing the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing is ended.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register setting etc. of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, control for performing a predetermined operation confirmation, and other controls for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the production operation using various production devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed in accordance with the production control command transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of the winning prize transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative pattern in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command for designating stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what is done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect display processing during variable display ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "miss". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. .. Also, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 designating termination of the small hitting game state, for example. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit completion production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit medium effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit mid-game production process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of end effect effect control at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, the game medium is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, referred to as bonus).

The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 047IW)
Next, the characteristic part 047IW will be described. In this feature part 047IW, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player.

Further, in this example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a door opening sensor (not shown) that detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened and outputs a detection signal. Further, in this example, the main board 11 is provided with a setting key (not shown) for switching to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In this example, since the board case (not shown) having the setting key is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming machine frame 3 closed. Is impossible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key requires the operation of the door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the door key can operate it. The setting key is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation. In the characteristic part 047IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used in combination. Further, in this example, a display monitor is arranged in the substrate case.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. As shown in FIG. 8A, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. Note that the setting is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-1, in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). In the case of “”, the jackpot probability is “2050/65536”, which is the lowest, and is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the highest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for the small hit, as shown in FIG. 8-1, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", the non-probability variation state (low probability state) and the probability variation state (high probability state). The small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536” regardless of whether it is a probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIG. The number of judgment values for each set value may be configured to match by making the difference "6".

In addition, when it is determined as a big hit, the big hit type such as a normal big hit (non-probability variation big hit), a probability variation big hit, a sudden probability variation big hit (2R probability variation big hit) is also determined. Each jackpot type is determined with the same probability regardless of whether it is "1" to "6". Further, when it is determined that the small hit, it may be configured to be further determined into a plurality of types of small hits, but also for the small hit type, any of the set values "1" to "6". Regardless of whether there is it, each small hit type is determined with the same probability.

Although the variation pattern is determined when the variation display is started, each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" is set.

(Setting confirmation process, setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature part 047IW will be described. 8-2 to 8-4 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 047IW. It should be noted that in the characteristic unit 047IW, the processes of steps IWS001 and S002 are the same as the processes of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the production control means to start until the production control means (specifically, the production control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 047IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means start waiting timer (step 047IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means start waiting timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 047IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 047IWS004 and the processes of steps 047IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 047IWS006.

By executing the processes of steps 047IWS003 to S005, the process of step 047IWS006 and thereafter is executed after waiting for the production control CPU 120 to be activated, and the setting values are changed and confirmed, and the RAM initialization and restoration processes are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear switch has been pressed when turning on the power to the gaming machine (step 047IWS006).

In this example, the RAM clear flag is not cleared in the power-off process (see step 047IWS031) described later, but the RAM clear flag is cleared once in step 047IWS006 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, and then the clear switch is set. If so, a case is shown in which the RAM clear flag is newly set (see steps 047IWS016 and S022), but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, if the RAM clear flag is also cleared when the power-off process is executed, and then the clear switch is set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the RAM clear flag is newly set. Good.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4 (step 047IWS007). Specifically, in step 047IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 047IWS012.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 047IWS008). In step 047IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 047IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 047IWS010.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 047IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values “1” to “6”. (Step 047IWS009). If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “6”, the process proceeds to step 047IWS011.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (N in step 047IWS008), or when it is determined that the set value stored in the RAM 102 is a value other than the set values "1" to "6" (Y in step 047IWS009). The CPU 103 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS010). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS012.

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of the set values “1” to “6” (N in step 047IWS009), the CPU 103 is executing the setting change process for changing the set value. It is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag indicating that is set (step 047IWS011). If the setting change flag is set (step 047IWS011; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 047IWS012.

In step 047IWS012, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON (step 047IWS012). If the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key is ON (step 047IWS013). If the setting key is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 047IWS014). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 047IWS015).

In this example, the RAM clear processing includes a RAM clear 1 processing (see step 047IWS051) and a RAM clear 2 processing (see step 047IWS015) executed when a RAM abnormality occurs.

In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the areas other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are retained without being cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 process is referred to as a clear storage area 1.

In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing the flag, counter, and buffer stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the areas other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 are cleared, and the performance ratio such as the ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is displayed. Information is not cleared but retained. In addition, in the RAM clear 2 processing, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Hereinafter, the storage area of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 process is referred to as a clear storage area 2. Therefore, in this example, the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 2 processing is larger than the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 that is cleared by the RAM clear 1 processing.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 047IWS016), and proceeds to step 047IWS025. The RAM clear flag is set in the clear storage area 2 of the RAM 102.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor is off (N in step 047IWS012), the setting key is off (N in step 047IWS013), or the output signal from the clear switch is off (step 047IWS014). In N), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the setting value abnormality error command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS017).

Next, the CPU 103 shifts to the loop processing of steps 047IWS018 to S020. In the loop process, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 047IWS018). When the wait time of 4 ms has elapsed, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 047IWS019 and displays a predetermined error (step 047IWS019). For example, the CPU 103 controls the display monitor to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E"). Further, the CPU 103 controls to externally output the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 047IWS020). Then, the processing after step 047IWS018 is repeatedly executed.

By executing the processing of steps 047IWS007 to S020, in the feature unit 047IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 047IWS007, S008, Y in step 047IWS009), power failure or the like occurs during setting change. In the case (Y of step 047IWS011), the RAM is cleared on condition that the setting key is turned on and the clear switch is turned on in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, and the setting values after step 047IWS025 are set. It can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the setting key and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting change flag is not set (step 047IWS011; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 047IWS021). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 047IWS022).

In this example, by executing the processes of step 047IWS022 and step 047IWS016, the RAM clear flag is set when the clear switch is first turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Then, after that, before the timer interrupt is set and the timer interrupt process (game control process) is started, there are multiple scenes where it is checked whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on. However, it is determined whether the clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on by checking whether or not the RAM clear flag is set instead of directly checking the state of the clear switch. (See step 047IWS025, S034, S048).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor is on (step 047IWS023). If the output signal from the door opening sensor is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key is ON (step 047IWS024). If the setting key is on, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 047IWS025). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the CPU 103 controls to send a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value is executed to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS026). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS030.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a setting change command indicating execution of the setting change process for changing the set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS027). ). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (step 047IWS028). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (that is, if an abnormality in the RAM 102 is detected), the CPU 103 causes the setting value determination buffer (a storage area provided in the RAM 102 for storing the current setting value). The set value is set to "1" (step 047IWS029). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS030. At this time, the CPU 103 resets the RAM abnormality flag.

In addition, on the production control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation command or a setting change command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5). Is displayed, a predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner). In this case, the production control board 12 may be configured to display a "maintenance mode" or the like and shift to the maintenance mode by pressing an operation button for production such as the push button 31B. The "maintenance mode" is, for example, the date and time setting of the real-time clock, the history of various error occurrences (a record of when and what kind of error occurred), and the setting change history (when the setting value was changed and after the change). This is a mode in which you can check the recorded settings. When the setting key is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also completed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a 4 ms wait process for measuring a wait time of 4 ms (step 047IWS030). Then, when the wait time of 4 ms elapses, the CPU 103 shifts to step 047IWS031 and executes power-off processing (step 047IWS031). In the power-off process of step 047IWS031, the CPU 103 executes a process of detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in the ON state). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 103 executes a process for stopping power supply for storing necessary data (for example, backup flag, checksum) in the backup RAM area. To do.

Next, the CPU 103 identifies the set value stored in the set value confirmation buffer, and displays the identified set value on the display monitor (step 047IWS032). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to externally output the security signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external terminal board (step 047IWS033).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 047IWS034). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process directly proceeds to step 047IWS043.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 047IWS035) and starts the setting change process. Next, it is confirmed whether or not the initial setting completion flag indicating that the value has been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time after the game machine is powered on (step 047IWS036). The clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether the switch is on or off) of the clear switch. For example, in the clear switch buffer, a value of "1" is set when the clear switch is on, and a value of "0" is set when the clear switch is off. If the initial setting completion flag is set (if the value has already been set in the clear switch buffer for the first time since the power of the gaming machine was turned on), the process proceeds to step 047IWS039.

If the flag set for the first time is not set (that is, if the value has not been set in the clear switch buffer even once after the game machine is powered on), the CPU 103 turns the clear switch buffer on. The value shown (for example, "1") is set (step 047IWS037). Further, the CPU 103 sets the initial setting completion flag (step 047IWS038).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the value currently set in the clear switch buffer in the previous clear switch buffer (step 047IWS039). The previous clear switch buffer is provided in the RAM 102 and is a buffer for setting the input state (whether it is in the on state or the off state) of the clear switch confirmed last time (4 ms before in this example). For example, the previous clear switch buffer is set to a value of "1" when the previously confirmed clear switch is in the on state, and is set to a value of "0" in the off state.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms the current input state of the clear switch and sets the current input state of the clear switch in the clear switch buffer (step 047IWS040). Next, the CPU 103 turns off the value set in the clear switch buffer last time (for example, “0”) and turns on the value set in the clear switch buffer (for example, “1”). It is confirmed whether or not (step 047IWS041).

If the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is off and the value previously set in the clear switch buffer is on, the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor. At the same time, it is stored in the set value confirmation buffer (update storage for the set value already stored) (step 047IWS042). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "2" and the set value "2" is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "3" and the set value "3" is stored in the set value determination buffer. When "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor, the display on the display monitor is updated to "1" and the set value "1" is stored in the set value determination buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key is on (step 047IWS043). If the setting key remains on, the process proceeds to step 047IWS030, the processes of steps 047IWS030 to S043 are repeatedly executed, and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is off, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, and proceeds to step 047IWS044.

When the RAM clear flag is not set by executing the processing of steps 047IWS025 to S043 described above (that is, when the clear switch is not turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (steps 047IWS025 and S034). N), the setting confirmation command is transmitted (step 047IWS026) and the setting confirmation process (particularly step 047IWS032) is performed, but the setting change process is not performed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is set (that is, when the clear switch is turned on when the power of the gaming machine is turned on) (step 047IWS025, S034 Y), a setting change command is transmitted (step 047IWS027). At the same time, a setting confirmation process (especially step 047IWS032) and a setting change process (especially 047IWS035 to S042) are performed.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) in the security information timer for setting the output period of the security signal (step 047IWS044). In this example, when the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed at the time of turning on the power of the gaming machine, the external output of the security signal is started by executing the process of step 047IWS033. The security information timer is set in step 047IWS044, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the value of the security information timer, so that the security signal continues until a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. And output to the outside.

On the other hand, in this example, the security signal is output to the outside even when a RAM abnormality occurs by executing the processing of step 047IWS020, but in this case, the power supply to the gaming machine is reset. The security signal is continuously output to the outside until it is done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 047IWS045). Further, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor (step 047IWS046). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control CPU 120 (step 047IWS047).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step 047IWS048). If the RAM clear flag is not set, the process proceeds to the recovery process of step 047IWS049. Note that the processing of steps 047IWS049 and S050 in this feature unit 047IW is the same as the processing of steps S6 and S7 shown in FIG.

If the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 1 process to clear the clear storage area 1 of the RAM 102 (047IWS051). Note that the processing of steps 047IWS052 to S055 in this feature unit 047IW is the same as the processing of steps S9 to S12 shown in FIG.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram of a process executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 047IW, as shown in FIG. 8-5, when the setting key is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. For example, if the setting confirmation process (particularly step 047IWS032) and the setting change process (particularly 047IWS035 to S042) are executed and the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 047IWS051)) is executed and the clear switch is off, Only the setting confirmation process (particularly step 047IWS032) is executed and the restoration process (step 047IWS049) is executed. If the setting key is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, only the initialization process (RAM clear 1 process (step 047IWS051)) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, it is restored. Only the process (step 047IWS049) is executed.

Next, a display mode of the display monitor in the setting confirmation process and the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) and 8-6(B), when the power is turned off (power is cut) by the operation of a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor ends. When the big winning game is open during a big hit game or a small hit game at the timing of turning off the power, the big prize hole is closed by stopping the supply of power to the solenoid 82.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-6(C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (in the case of Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key is turned on The setting check process is executed by the CPU 103 under the condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor.

In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor in this way, as shown in FIG. 8-6(D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the clear switch by the store clerk or the like in the game hall in the setting change process. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor is sequentially updated every time (for example, every time the clear switch is operated, the numerical values are updated as 1→2→3→1→... ). In addition, the set value displayed on the display monitor is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-6(E), the CPU 103 turns off the display monitor based on that the setting key is turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game hall, thereby causing the store clerk or the like in the game hall. Is notified that the new setting value is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Further, when the hold storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the hold storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-6(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process, and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the jackpot type, the variation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

It should be noted that the setting change process in the characteristic unit 047IW exemplifies a mode in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor in the setting change process is not a setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic part 047IW), or a setting value that is most advantageous to the player. ("3" in the case of this characteristic part 047IW) may be displayed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 8-6, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display on the display monitor when confirming or changing the setting value. Not limited to the mode, for example, the setting value may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays on the display monitor. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor. In this case, for example, if the setting value is "1", a 4-digit display of "-S-1" is displayed on the display monitor, and if the setting value is "2", 4 digits of "-S-2" is displayed on the display monitor. Digits may be displayed, or if the set value is "3", 4-digit "-S-3" may be displayed on the display monitor. Further, for example, the set value may be displayed on all four-digit displays on the display monitor. For example, if the setting value is "1", the display monitor displays four digits of "1111", and if the setting value is "2", the display monitor displays four digits of "2222". Good.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, the process of the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the present feature unit 047IW will be described. 8-7 and 8-8 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number) (step 047IWS171). For example, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step 047IWS172). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step 047IWS173). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step 047IWS174).

By performing the processing of steps 047IWS172 to S174, in the characteristic portion 047IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in accordance with the order of starting winning in which the game balls win the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol It may be configured to execute and.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number of the special symbol pointer = 1 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 047IWS175). Specifically, the CPU 103, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories=1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the content of each storage area (step 047IWS176). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each of the first reserved storage buffers. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

That is, the CPU 103, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages=n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number)=1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 047IWS177). The CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 047IWS178). In the characteristic unit 112, as described above, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed when the power is turned on by executing the process of step 047IWS047. The setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of 047IWS178.

In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted when the setting value command is transmitted in step 047IWS047 and when the setting value command is transmitted in step 047IWS178, but the setting value command is different. It may be configured to send a command. For example, in step 047IWS047, a command that directly specifies a set value (for example, commands 9E01(H) to 9E06(H) according to the set values “1” to “6”) is transmitted, while in step 047IWS178, the set value is set. It may be configured such that the identifiable fluctuation pattern command is transmitted and the fluctuation pattern commands are prepared for the number of set values (for example, when the set value is “1”, commands 1C00(H) to are prepared as the fluctuation pattern commands). , The command 2C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "2", the command 3C00(H)-is prepared as the variation pattern command at the setting value "3", and the variation pattern command at the setting value "4". Command 4C00(H)- is prepared, a setting value "5" prepares a command 5C00(H)- as a variation pattern command, and a setting value "6" prepares a command 6C00(H)- as a variation pattern command. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, if the different variation pattern command is transmitted for each set value even when the same variation pattern is used, the total number of variation patterns×the number of set values (6 in this example) ) Change pattern command is required, which may increase the data capacity. Therefore, for example, the setting value command may be transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern may be provided with the variation pattern commands corresponding to the number of setting values. Good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation are changed pattern commands corresponding to the number of set values. May be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 047IWS047) sent when the power is turned on and the set value command (see step 047IWS178) sent when the fluctuation starts. It is not limited to various forms. For example, even if the set value command for power-on and the set value command for fluctuation start are configured as separate commands and different set value commands are transmitted at power-on and at fluctuation start Good.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation is shown, but it is configured to transmit the effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the setting value command. Good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the setting value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if it is the setting value "2", The variation pattern command A-2 is transmitted, the variation pattern command A-3 is transmitted when the setting value is "3", and the variation pattern command A-4 is transmitted when the setting value is "4". The variation pattern command A-5 may be transmitted when the set value is "5", and the variation pattern command A-6 may be transmitted when the set value is "6".

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 side is configured to be able to output the same fluctuation pattern command (for example, fluctuation pattern command A) regardless of the set value, and depending on which setting value is set on the effect control CPU 120 side. It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio thereof is different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high. If the setting value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 is selected or the variation pattern A-3 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 4, the variation pattern A-4 is selected or the variation pattern A. -4 is selected at a high rate, variation pattern A-5 is selected if the setting value is 5, or variation pattern A-5 is selected at a high rate, and variation pattern A-6 is selected at the setting value 6. Alternatively, the variation pattern A-6 may be selected at a high rate. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-6 may have the same variation time, but may be configured to have different presence/absence of pseudo-repetition, number of pseudo-repetitions, presence/absence of reach, and type. Further, in this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio The variation pattern may be selected with.

Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 047IWS179). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designating command in the case of the probability variation state, and controls to transmit a time saving state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control is performed to send the normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 8-1) with the random number value MR1 and, if they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. The program to execute. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

If the value of the random number value MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 047IWS180), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 047IWS181). When it is determined to be a small hit (Y in step 047IWS181), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit has been made (step 047IWS182), and proceeds to step 047IWS186.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step 047IWS181), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step 047IWS186.

When the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 047IWS180), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 047IWS183). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table to determine the type (eg, normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, or sudden variation) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. Big hit) is determined as the type of big hit (step 047IWS184).

Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 047IWS185). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable variation big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 047IWS186). For example, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the symbol "-" which is a falling symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, "7" which is a big hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, you may decide to the stop symbol of a different special symbol according to the big hit type. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 047IWS187).

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the characteristic unit 047IW will be described. FIG. 8-9 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 047IW. In the characteristic unit 047IW, the processing of steps 047IWS201 to S206 is the same as the processing of steps S71 to S76 shown in FIG.

When the effect control process process of step 047IWS206 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 047IWS207). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 047IWS207, the variable display of the small symbols is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbols in the image display device 5, separately from the variable display of the decorative symbols. It In this example, the small design has a smaller display size than the decorative design, and is less visible than the decorative design. Further, in this example, when the pseudo-relation is executed, the variable display is once again executed after the pseudo-repeated chance eye symbol is temporarily displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the re-variation is executed once or plural times. However, regarding the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without accompanying the temporary stop display or the re-variation even when the pseudo-link is executed. Further, in this example, as will be described later, a blackout notice effect in which the display screen of the image display device 5 goes dark (blackout) may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the small symbol Regarding the variable display of, the small symbol variable display is continuously executed so that it can be visually recognized even while the blackout notice effect is being executed.

Further, in the present example, as will be described later, the setting change suggestion effect is executed in the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display is such that the decorative pattern vibrates up and down. Regarding the variable display of the small symbols, the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed without the vibration of the symbols even while the setting change suggesting effect is being executed.

The process of step 047IWS208 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG. When the effect random number updating process in step 047IWS208 is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting change suggestion notification process for executing the setting change suggestion notification for informing that the setting change suggestion effect may be executed. (Step 047IWS209). Then, the process returns to step 047IWS203.

(Command analysis processing)
8-10 and 8-11 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step 047IWS205). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 047IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 047IWS302). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 047IWS303). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 047IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 047IWS305).

If the received production control command is a setting value abnormality error command (step 047IWS306), the production control CPU 120 executes setting value abnormality error notification (step 047IWS307). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A setting value error is occurring" on the image display device 5, or outputs a sound or an error sound indicating the setting value error from the speakers 8L and 8R. It outputs and controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the set value abnormality error is notified, the loudspeaker 8L, 8R outputs a maximum volume voice or an error sound, and the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits the maximum brightness (for example, a full-color LED). In this case, it is desirable to emit white light.

If the received production control command is a command for restoration (step 047IWS308), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a restoration screen (step 047IWS309). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a character display such as “in recovery” or to display an initial result (for example, a combination of symbols “123”).

If the received effect control command is the initialization designation command (step 047IWS310), the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial screen (step 047IWS311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display a game machine maker's logo display or an initial result (for example, a combination of symbols “123”). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets an initialization flag indicating that the initialization process (RAM clear process) has been executed (step 047IWS312).

If the received production control command is a variation pattern command (production control command for designating a variation pattern) (step 047IWS320), the production control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command stored in the RAM 122. The data is stored in the area (step 047IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 047IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (effect control command for specifying whether to make a big hit or small hit, big hit type, small hit type) (step 047IWS323), for effect control The CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 047IWS324).

If the received production control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (a production control command that designates that the stop symbol of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 047IWS325), the production control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag ( Step 047IWS326).

If the received production control command is a big hit start designation command (a production control command that specifies the start of a big hit game) (step 047IWS327), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit start designation command reception flag (step 047IWS328).

If the received production control command is a big hit end designation command (production control command that specifies the end of the big hit game) (step 047IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step 047IWS330).

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step 047IWS331). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS301.

(Variable display start setting process)
8-12 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 047IWS401). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS 401 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (stop). (Symbol) is determined (step 047IWS402). That is, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the process of step 047IWS402 to display the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means A display result determining means for determining (pattern) is realized. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. In step 047IWS402, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on only the variation pattern command. ..

In step 047IWS402, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbol. Further, for example, when the received display result designating command indicates a normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which even three symbols are the same as the stop symbols. To do.

Moreover, when the received display result designation command indicates the sudden change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decoration patterns of the sudden change jackpot pattern. For example, the effect control CPU 120 suddenly determines a combination of symbols "357" as the sudden variation big hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative designs of the small hit design. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of symbols of "357", which is the same as the sudden probability big hit symbol, as the small hit symbol.

Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, the combination of the decorative designs in which the left and right two designs are aligned is determined.

When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 047IWS402, creates a chance eye symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , A combination of a big hit pattern that does not reach and one pattern that is offset by one) are also determined.

CPU120 for production control extracts the random number for determining a stop design, for example, and uses the stop design determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the design and the numerical value are associated with each other to determine the stop design of the design. decide. That is, the stop design is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting change suggestion effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the setting change suggestion effect indicating the possibility that the setting value setting change has been made (step 047IWS403).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the setting suggestion effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the setting suggestion effect that suggests which of the set values “1” to “6” the currently set setting value is. Is executed (step 047IWS404). In this example, as the setting suggestion effect, a telop suggestion effect executed in a mode of displaying a telop display on the image display device 5 and a mini character executed in a mode of displaying a plurality of mini character images on the image display device 5. Suggestive production can be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the announcement effect setting process for setting the presence and type of the announcement effect (step 047IWS405). In this example, as the notice effect, it is possible to execute a blackout notice effect in which the display screen of the image display device 5 goes dark (blackout) and a button notice effect accompanied by the operation of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and various notice effects such as a step-up notice effect, a group notice effect, and an accessory notice effect may be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the blackout notice effect is decided in the notice effect setting process of step 047IWS405 (step 047IWS406). If execution of the blackout notice effect has not been decided, the process proceeds to step 047IWS409. If the execution of the blackout advance notice effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the setting change suggestion effect has been determined in the setting change suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS403 (step 047IWS407). If execution of the setting change suggesting effect has not been decided, the process proceeds to step 047IWS409. If the execution of the setting change suggesting effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 sets a notice restriction flag indicating that the execution of the blackout notice effect is limited (step 047IWS408). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS409.

In this example, the blackout notice effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Further, in the present example, the setting change suggestion effect is also executed at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and is also executed in such a manner that the left, middle and right decorative patterns are vibrated vertically in the image display device 5. Therefore, if both the blackout advance notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect are executed at the start of the change of the decorative pattern, the display screen of the image display device 5 is blacked out (black out). Even if the decorative pattern is vibrated vertically, the player cannot recognize the setting change suggestion effect. Therefore, in this example, when execution of both the blackout advance notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect is determined, the advance notice flag is set in step 047IWS408 to limit the execution of the blackout notice effect. doing.

In addition, in this example, when the execution of both the blackout notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect is determined, the case where the execution of the blackout notice effect is restricted is shown, but such a mode I can't stop. For example, in the case of executing the first variable display after turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the blackout advance notice effect and the setting change suggestion effect are configured by not performing the lottery itself of the blackout notice effect. May be configured so that there is no case where they are executed in duplicate.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the mini character suggestion effect is decided in the setting suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS404 (step 047IWS409). If the execution of the mini character suggestive effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display eight mini character images (step 047IWS410). In this case, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the display of eight mini character images is started based on the start timing of the mini-character suggestion effect, and the execution of the mini-character suggestion effect is started. You may control. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the operation number counter for counting the number of operations by the player in the mini character suggestion effect to 0 (step 047IWS411).

In this example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern accompanied by the pseudo-relation is executed, it is possible to determine the execution of the mini character suggestive effect for each change including the initial change and each re-change, but in step 047IWS409, the pseudo character When the execution of the mini-character suggestion effect is decided in the first variation of the variation display of the decorative pattern accompanied by a series, it is determined to be Y, and the process proceeds to steps 047IWS410 and S411.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, in the case where it has been decided to execute the variation pattern, the setting change suggesting effect, the telop suggesting effect, and the notice effect, a process corresponding to the setting change suggesting effect, the telop suggesting effect, and the notice effect. A table is selected (step 047IWS412). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 047IWS413).

The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 120 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (effect parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation forming the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decorative pattern in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. Further, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

If execution of the setting change suggestion effect is determined in the setting change suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS403, a process table including the setting change suggestion effect is selected in step 047IWS412, and step 047IWS414 is selected according to the selected process table. By executing the process of step 047IWS805 of the variable display effect process (step S172), the setting change suggestion effect is executed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started.

If execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined in the setting suggestion effect setting process of step 047IWS404, a process table including the telop suggestion effect is selected in step 047IWS412, and step 047IWS414 and variable display are selected according to the selected process table. By executing the process of step 047IWS805 of the medium effect process (step S172), the telop suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

When execution of the blackout notice effect is determined in the notice effect setting process of step 047IWS405, a process table including the blackout notice effect is selected in step 047IWS412, and step 047IWS414 and variable are selected according to the selected process table. By executing the process of step 047IWS805 of the display effect process (step S172), the blackout notice effect is executed at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. However, in this case, even if it is decided to execute the blackout notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 does not include the blackout notice effect if the notice limitation flag (see step 047IWS408) is set. Select a process table and limit execution of blackout notice production.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 operates as an effect device (image display device 5 as effect part, effect part as effect part) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts is executed (step 047IWS414).

In addition, in the characteristic part 047IW, the effect control CPU 120 performs control such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 047IWS415). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 047IWS416), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Setting change suggestion production setting process)
FIG. 8-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change suggestion effect setting process (step 047IWS403). In the setting change suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets whether or not the first-time fluctuation completed flag indicating that the first fluctuation display has already been executed after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Is confirmed (step 047IWS501). If the first-time fluctuated flag is set (that is, if the second and subsequent fluctuating displays after turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are to be executed), the process is ended. If the first fluctuation completed flag is not set (if the first fluctuation display is performed after powering on the pachinko gaming machine 1), the effect control CPU 120 sets the first fluctuation completed flag (step 047IWS502). ), and confirms whether the initialization flag is set (step 047IWS503). If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if the recovery process has been executed), the process is terminated as it is.

If the initialization flag is set (that is, if the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the setting for determining the presence and type of the setting change suggesting effect. A lottery process based on a random number is performed using the suggestion effect determination table to determine the presence/absence and type of the setting change suggestion effect (step 047IWS504). Then, when determining to execute the setting change suggesting effect, effect control CPU 120 stores information capable of specifying the determined type of setting change suggesting effect in the setting change suggesting effect storage area provided in RAM 122. (Step 047 IWS505).

FIG. 8-14 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the setting change suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in the setting change suggestion effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no setting change suggestion effect, execution of setting change suggestion effect A, and execution of setting change suggestion effect AB, respectively. ing. In this example, the “setting change suggestion effect A” is an effect that is executed in such a manner as to vibrate the left, right, and middle decorative patterns up and down on the image display device 5 when the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. Further, the “setting change suggestion effect B” vibrates the left, middle, and right decorative designs up and down on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display of the decorative designs, and also displays an effect image around the left, middle, and right decorative designs. It is an effect executed according to the display mode.

As shown in FIG. 8-14, in this example, the setting change suggestion effect A and the setting change suggestion are performed with different probabilities depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is currently set. The performance B is configured to be determined. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in the present example, the setting change suggestive effect B is configured to be executable when the set values “4” to “6” are relatively advantageous to the player, If the set values are relatively unfavorable to the player, "1" to "3", the setting change suggestion effect B is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-14, in this example, the probability that the setting change suggestion effect B is executed is highest when the setting value is “6”, and the setting change suggestion is performed when the setting value is “5”. The probability that the effect B will be executed is next highest, and the probability that the setting change suggestion effect B will be executed when the set value is “4” is next highest. Therefore, in this example, even when the setting change suggesting effect is executed, the player is expected to be set to an advantageous setting value particularly when the setting change suggesting effect B is executed. Can be made.

In addition, in this example, the setting change suggestion effect may be executed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed by executing the process of step 047IWS503. In this example, as already described, the setting change process may be executed and the setting value may be changed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, if the setting change suggestion effect is executed by configuring the setting change suggestion effect so that it can be executed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed, it is possible that the player has changed the set value. Can be suggested.

In this example, when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. Although it is executed, the configuration change suggesting effect may not be executed with a low probability in some cases, but the setting change suggesting effect may be executed with a probability of 100%.

Further, in this example, the case where the setting change suggesting effect is configured to be executable when the initialization designation command is received (when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed) is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, if a setting change command is received, the setting change suggestive effect is configured to be executable, or the setting value has been changed, or other special purpose that can identify the possibility that the setting value has been changed. The setting change suggestion effect is configured to be executable based on the reception of the command that can identify the possibility that the setting value has been changed in some form, such as configuring the setting change suggestion effect to be executable when a command is received. May be.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 047IWS501 is executed, so that the setting change suggestion effect can be executed only when the first variation display is executed after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

It should be noted that the setting change suggestion effect is not limited to the mode in which the setting change suggestion effect can be executed only after the power is turned on, and the setting change suggestion effect is also performed when the change display for the second time and after is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be configured to be executable. Further, for example, it is possible to execute the setting change suggestion effect based on the lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes or more) after the last variable display is finished (or in the customer waiting demonstration display state). You may. In addition, for example, when the game history data is configured to be transmittable to a mobile terminal (a so-called mobile interlocking type), a setting change suggestion is made based on the fact that the player has performed a game ending operation and the game history data has been reset. The effect may be configured to be executable. Further, for example, the setting change suggestion effect may be configured to be executable based on the fact that the player has been changed by some method. In addition, for example, when a real-time clock is installed, a setting change suggestion effect is displayed in a variable display executed in a specific time zone (for example, 9:00 to 11:00) based on date and time information from the real-time clock. It may be configured to be executable. However, it is desirable to configure the number of times the setting change suggestion effect is executed to be one, for example, by executing the setting change suggestion effect in the first variable display in the time zone of 9:00 to 11:00. ..

(Setting suggestion production setting process)
FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting suggestion effect setting process (step 047IWS404). In the setting suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number using a telop suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the telop suggestion effect, and determines the presence or absence of the telop suggestion effect. (Step 047IWS601). When the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 stores information capable of specifying that the execution of the telop suggestion effect has been determined in the telop suggestion effect storage area provided in the RAM 122 ( Step 047IWS602).

FIG. 8-16 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the telop suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the telop suggestion effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no telop suggestion effect and for execution of the telop suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-16, in this example, the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined with different probabilities depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” the currently set value is. Is configured. As shown in FIG. 8-16, in the present example, the telop suggestive effect can be executed when the set value is “4” to “6” which is relatively advantageous to the player. When the set value is "1" to "3" which is disadvantageous to the player, the telop suggestion effect is not executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16, in this example, the probability that the telop suggestion effect is executed is highest when the setting value is “6”, and the telop suggestion effect is executed when the setting value is “5”. The probability of being performed is next highest, and the probability that the telop suggestive effect is executed when the setting value is “4” is next highest. Therefore, in this example, particularly when the telop suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player expect the possibility of being set to an advantageous set value, and to suggest a highly accurate set value. It is configured to be able to.

The determination rate of whether or not to execute the telop suggestion effect may be changed according to the jackpot expectation. For example, in a variable display with a high jackpot expectation level, other notice effects are preferentially executed, and thus the execution of the telop suggestion effect may be limited.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the probability change state is in progress (step 047IWS603). Note that whether or not the probability variation state is in progress can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the probability variation state background designation command is received as the background designation command. If it is not in the probability changing state, the processing is ended as it is. Therefore, in this example, the mini character suggestion production can be executed by executing the processing of step 047IWS604 and thereafter only when the probability change state is not in progress.

When it is determined in step 047IWS603 that the probability change state is in progress, a dedicated setting suggestion effect different from the mini character suggestion effect may be configured to be executable. Further, for example, the configuration suggestive effect may be configured to be executable during the time saving state or the high base state, not only during the probability changing state.

If it is not in the probability changing state, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the pseudo link is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is started this time (step 047IWS604). Whether or not the pseudo-link is executed is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS401 of the variable display start setting process includes the pseudo-link. it can.

If it is not the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation (N in step 047IWS604), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the telop suggestion effect is decided in step 047IWS601 (step 047IWS605). If the execution of the telop suggestion effect has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS606). If the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS607).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the mini character suggestion effect determination table selected in steps 047IWS606 and S607, and determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS608). When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the mini-character suggestion effect, the CPU 120 stores the information capable of specifying the decided type of the mini-character suggestion effect in the mini-character suggestion effect storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 047IWS609). ).

8-17 to 8-20 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the mini character suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the mini character suggestion effect determination table, there is no mini character suggestion effect, mini character suggestion effect A is executed, mini character suggestion effect B is executed, mini character suggestion effect C is executed, and mini character suggestion is executed. A determination value is assigned to each of execution D, mini character suggestion E, mini character suggestion F, mini character suggestion G, and mini character suggestion H.

In this example, when performing the mini character suggestive effect, the effect is started in a state where eight mini character images are displayed, and the mini character image is set to 1 each time the player presses the push button 31B once. An effect that is erased one by one is executed.

In the "mini-character suggestion production A", up to one mini-character image is deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the second time and thereafter, the mini-character is no longer required. It is an effect that the image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect B", up to two mini-character images are erased in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the third time or more, it is no longer required. This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect C", up to three mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player. However, even if the push button 31B is operated for the fourth time or later, it is no longer required. This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased.

Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect D", up to four mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the fifth time or more, more This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestive effect E", up to five mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the sixth time and thereafter, no more. This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased. Further, in the "mini-character suggestion effect F", up to six mini-character images are deleted according to the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but even if the push button 31B is operated for the seventh time or more This is an effect in which the mini character image is not erased.

Further, in the "mini-character suggestive effect G", if the player pushes down the push button 31B up to seven times, up to seven mini character images are deleted, but the push button 31B is operated after the eighth time. Also, this is an effect in which the mini character image is not deleted any more (hence, only one mini character image remains). Further, in the “mini-character suggestive effect H”, if the player presses the push button 31B up to seven times, all eight mini character images are deleted (the seventh and eighth minis are operated by the seventh operation. (The character image is erased at the same time).

As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, in the present example, the mini character suggestion effect A with different probabilities depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” is currently set. ~ Execution of the mini character suggestive effect H is configured to be determined. As shown in FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20, when the setting value is “1”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect A will be determined is relatively high. When the set value is “2”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestion effect B is decided is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestion effect A. When the set value is “3”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestion effect C is decided is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestion effect B.

When the set value is "4", the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect D is decided is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestive effect C. When the set value is “5”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect E will be determined is relatively high, and the precision of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggestive effect D. Further, when the setting value is “6”, the probability that the execution of the mini character suggestion effect F will be determined is relatively high, and the accuracy of the set value suggestion is higher than that of the mini character suggesting effect E.

Further, the mini-character suggestive effect G can be determined only when the set value is "6", and when the mini-character suggestive effect G is executed, it is determined that the set value is "6". That is, in the mini character suggesting effect, if seven mini character images out of eight mini character images are erased and only one mini character image remains, it is determined that the setting value is “6”. If the mini character suggestive effect G is executed, it is determined that the particular set value (in this example, the set value "6"), so the set value suggestion has the highest accuracy.

Further, the mini-character suggestive effect H can be determined only when the super-reach effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and if the mini-character suggestive effect H is executed, the super-reach effect is executed. Is confirmed. That is, in the mini character suggestion effect, if all eight mini character images are erased, it is determined that the super reach effect is executed (it does not suggest the set value).

In step 047IWS606, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is started this time. Whether or not the super reach effect is executed is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS401 of the variable display start setting process includes the super reach effect. Can be determined by. If the variable display is not accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table for non-super reach shown in FIG. 8-17. Further, in the case of the variable display accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table at the time of the super reach shown in FIG. 8-18. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS608, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production. Therefore, the execution of the mini character suggestive effect H may be determined only when the super reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, in step 047IWS607, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS608, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in the limiting mini character suggestive effect determination table, determination values are not assigned to the mini character suggestive effect G and the mini character suggestive effect H. In this example, as described above, the telop suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the set value with relatively high accuracy. On the other hand, among the mini-character suggestive effects, the mini-character suggestive effect G is an effect in which it is decided that the setting value is “6”, and is an effect that suggests the setting value with the highest accuracy. Therefore, in this example, when the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the telop suggestion effect with high accuracy of the setting value suggestion is used by using the restriction mini-character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. Both of the mini character suggestive effects G are configured so as not to be executed.

If the variation display is accompanied by pseudo-repetition (Y in step 047IWS604), the effect control CPU 120 causes the pseudo-repetition counter to count the number of fluctuations in the pseudo-repetition (the number of times including the initial fluctuation and each re-variation). The number of fluctuations of is set (step 047IWS610). For example, in the case of a variation display involving three pseudo-repetitions, 4 (first variation+three re-variations) is set in the pseudo-repetition counter. Further, for example, in the case of a variation display involving one pseudo-repetition, 2 (first variation+one re-variation) is set in the pseudo-repetition number counter.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined in step 047IWS601 (step 047IWS611). If the execution of the telop suggestion effect has not been decided, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo continuous number counter is 1 (step 047IWS612). If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is 1 (that is, if the final variation of the mini character suggestive effect is to be determined), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestive effect. The normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table is selected as the table for (step 047IWS613). If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is not 1 (that is, if the mini character suggestive effect of the change before the final change of the pseudo repeat is determined), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestive effect. A non-final variation mini character suggestion effect determination table is selected as a table for determination (step 047IWS614). On the other hand, if the execution of the telop suggestion effect has been determined, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table as a table for determining the presence and type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS615). ..

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the mini character suggestion effect determination table selected in steps 047IWS613 to S615, and determines the presence and type of the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS616).

In step 047IWS613, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the super reach effect is executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is started this time. Whether or not the super reach effect is executed is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern command read in step 047IWS401 of the variable display start setting process includes the super reach effect. Can be determined by. In addition, in this example, when the super reach effect is executed in the variation display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the super reach effect is executed in the final variation in the pseudo operation. If the variable display is not accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table for non-super reach shown in FIG. 8-17. Further, in the case of the variable display accompanied by the super reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mini-character suggestion effect determination table at the time of the super reach shown in FIG. 8-18. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS616, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production. Therefore, only when the super reach effect is executed, the execution of the mini character suggestion effect H may be determined in the final variation of the pseudo-parties.

Further, in step 047IWS614, the effect control CPU 120 selects the non-final variation mini character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-19. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS616, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production.

As shown in FIG. 8-19, in the non-final variation mini character suggestion effect determination table, no determination value is assigned to the mini character suggestion effect H. Therefore, in this example, even when the super reach effect is executed in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the mini character suggestion effect H is not executed in the change before the final change, and only in the final change. The mini character suggestive effect H is configured to be executable.

In step 047IWS615, the effect control CPU 120 selects the limiting mini character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. And CPU120 for production control performs step 047IWS616, performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected mini character suggestion production determination table, and determines the presence and type of mini character suggestion production. Therefore, in this example, even in the variable display accompanied by pseudo-relation, when the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined, the setting value is set by using the limiting mini-character suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 8-20. Both the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect G having high suggestion accuracy are configured not to be executed.

It should be noted that the determination rate of whether or not to execute the mini-character suggestion effect may be changed according to the jackpot expectation. For example, in a variable display with a high jackpot expectation degree, the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect may be restricted because other notice effects are preferentially executed.

Next, when the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the determined type of the mini-character suggestive effect is more accurate than the type of the mini-character suggestive effect that is determined as the mini-character suggestive effect executed in the previous variation. It is confirmed whether or not it is a mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS617).

In step 047IWS617, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the mini-character suggestion effect C in the first variation and then decides to execute the mini-character suggestion effect D in the first re-variation, the effect control CPU 120 determines that It is determined that the high-precision mini character suggestive effect has been determined. On the other hand, for example, when the execution of the mini-character suggestion production C is decided in the first variation and then the execution of the mini-character suggestion production B is decided in the first re-variation, the mini-character suggestion production having lower accuracy than the previous variation is decided. It is judged that it did.

When it is determined that the mini-character suggestion effect having lower precision than the previous variation is determined (N in step 047IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 moves to step 047IWS611. That is, when a mini character suggestive effect having a lower accuracy than the previous change is determined, the determination content of the mini character suggestive effect of step 047IWS618 is not stored and the value of the pseudo consecutive number counter of step 047IWS619 is not updated, and step 047IWS611 The process from S616 to S616 is executed again, the determined contents of the mini character suggestive effect having a lower accuracy than the previous variation are discarded, and the mini character suggestive effect of the same number of variations in the pseudo-player is determined again. With such a configuration, in this example, the pseudo character suggestion is configured so that there is no case where a mini character suggestive effect having a lower precision than the mini character suggestive effect executed in the previous change is executed in a later change. There is.

The processing mode configured so that the mini-character suggestion effect having a lower accuracy than the mini-character suggestion effect executed in the previous change may not be executed in the later change is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, when deciding the mini-character suggestive effect to be executed in the re-fluctuation after the pseudo-players, use a table (kinsoku table) that contains only mini-character suggestive effects of a higher precision than the mini-character suggestive effect determined in the previous variation. It may be configured to determine the presence and type of the mini character suggestive effect.

Further, in this example, when the pseudo-relation is executed, the mini-reach suggestion effect H of the super reach determination is configured to be executable only in the final variation, but the embodiment is not limited thereto. For example, the change before the final change is configured to be able to execute the mini-character suggestive effect H, and the change after executing the mini-character suggestive effect H is configured to be able to execute only the mini-character suggestive effect G having the set value “6” fixed. Good. Even with such a configuration, since the mini-character suggestive effect G is the most accurate effect in the sense that the set value "6" is confirmed, it is later than the mini-character suggestive effect executed in the previous change. It is possible to realize a configuration in which there is no case where a mini-character suggestive production having a low accuracy is executed due to a change in.

When it is determined that the mini-character suggestive effect having a higher precision than the previous variation is determined (Y in step 047IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 determines the determined mini-character suggestive effect when the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect is determined. The information capable of specifying the type is stored in the mini character suggestion effect storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 047IWS618). Although it may be determined in step 047IWS616 that the mini character suggestive effect is not executed in the change, if it is determined that the mini character suggestive effect is not executed, it is determined as Y in step 047IWS617.

In addition, in this example, in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the mini-character suggestive effect is not always executed at every change in the pseudo-repetition, and the case where the mini-character suggestive effect can be intermittently executed is shown. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the mini character suggestive effect is executed in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo string, the mini character suggestive effect may be executed every time the pseudo character is changed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo consecutive number counter (step 047IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the pseudo consecutive number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 047IWS620). If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is not 0 (that is, if there is a change in which the mini-character suggestive effect has not yet been decided among the changes in the pseudo-repetition), the process proceeds to step 047IWS611. If the value of the pseudo-repetition counter is 0 (that is, if the mini-character suggestive effect has been determined for all the fluctuations in the pseudo-repetition), the process ends.

(Preliminary notice setting process)
FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the notice effect setting process (step 047IWS405). In the notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a blackout notice effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the blackout notice effect, and determines whether or not there is a blackout notice effect. It is determined (step 047IWS701).

FIG. 8-22(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the blackout notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-22(A), in the blackout advance notice effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no blackout notice effect and for executing the blackout notice effect, respectively. As shown in FIG. 8-22(A), in this example, it is determined that the blackout notice effect is executed with a probability of 70% in the case of a big hit, and the blackout with a probability of 10% in the case of a big hit. It is decided to execute the notice production.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a button notification effect determination table for determining the presence or absence of the button notification effect, and determines the presence or absence of the button notification effect (step 047IWS702).

FIG. 8-22(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the button advance notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 8-22(B), in the button advance notice effect determination table, determination values are assigned for no button advance notice effect and for executing the button advance notice effect, respectively. As shown in FIG. 8-22(B), in this example, it is determined that the button advance notice effect is executed with a probability of 70% in the case of a big hit, and the button advance notice effect with a probability of 10% in the case of a big hit. Decide to execute.

When the execution of the blackout advance notice effect or the button advance notice effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 provides the RAM 122 with information that can specify that the execution of the blackout advance notice effect or the button advance notice effect has been determined. The notice production storage area is stored (step 047IWS703).

In this example, the blackout notice effect is an effect executed when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. However, in the present example, as already described, even if the execution of the blackout notice effect is decided, if the setting change suggestion effect is executed, the execution of the blackout notice effect is restricted and the blackout notice effect is limited. May not be executed (see steps 047IWS406 to S408). Further, in this example, as will be described later, even when the execution of the blackout notice effect is limited, if the variable display is accompanied by the pseudo-relation, the limited blackout notice effect is reproduced. It may be executed at the beginning of the fluctuation.

(Direction processing during variable display)
8-23 to FIG. 8-25 are flowcharts showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 047IWS801) and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 047IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 047IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step 047IWS804). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 047IWS805).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the mini character suggestive effect (step 047IWS806). In the case of the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, it is confirmed whether or not it is decided to execute the mini-character suggestive effect at the first variation or the re-variation during the execution. If it has been decided to execute the mini character suggestive effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input. Is confirmed (step 047IWS807). If the push operation of the push button 31B is detected, the effect control CPU 120 increments the value of the operation number counter by 1 (step 047IWS808).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 (step 047IWS809). If the value of the operation number counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the first mini-character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 2 (step 047IWS811). If the value of the operation number counter is 2, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestive effects B to H are determined as the types of the mini-character suggestive effect (step 047IWS812). If the mini-character suggestive effects B to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the second mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the second pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS812, if the mini character suggestive effect A is determined, the second mini character image is displayed. Is not erased.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 2, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 3 (step 047IWS814). If the value of the number-of-operations counter is 3, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestive effects C to H are determined as the types of the mini-character suggestive effect (step 047IWS815). If the mini character suggestive effects C to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the third mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS816). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the third press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS815, if the mini character suggestive effects A to B are determined, the third mini The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 3, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 4 (step 047IWS817). If the value of the number-of-operations counter is 4, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestive effects D to H have been determined as the types of the mini-character suggestive effect (step 047IWS818). If the mini character suggestive effects D to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the fourth mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS819). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the fourth press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS818, if the mini character suggestive effects A to C are determined, the fourth mini The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 4, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 5 (step 047IWS820). If the value of the operation number counter is 5, the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestive effects E to H have been determined as the types of the mini character suggestive effect (step 047IWS821). If the mini character suggestive effects E to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the fifth mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS822). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the fifth press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS821, if the mini character suggestive effects A to D are determined, the fifth mini The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 5, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 6 (step 047IWS823). If the value of the operation number counter is 6, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestive effects F to H are determined as the types of the mini-character suggestive effect (step 047IWS824). If the mini-character suggestive effects F to H have been determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the sixth mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS825). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the sixth press operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the process of step 047IWS824, if the mini character suggestive effects A to E are determined, the sixth mini character is produced. The character image is not deleted.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 6, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 7 (step 047IWS826). If the value of the operation number counter is 7, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini character suggestion effect G is determined as the type of the mini character suggestion effect (step 047IWS827). If the mini-character suggestive effect G is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the seventh mini character image displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS828). If the mini-character suggestion effect G has not been determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the case where the mini-character suggestion effect H has been determined as the type of the mini-character suggestion effect (step 047IWS829). If the mini-character suggestion effect H is determined, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to simultaneously erase the seventh and eighth mini character images displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS830). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS831.

Even if the seventh pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected by executing the processing of steps 047IWS827 and S829, if the mini character suggestive effects A to F are decided, the seventh operation is performed. And the eighth mini character image is not deleted.

On the other hand, conversely, for example, even when the execution of the mini character suggestion effect G or the mini character suggestion effect H is determined, if the push button 31B is not pressed the seventh time, Y is determined in step 047IWS826. Since the determination is not made, the process does not proceed to steps 047IWS827 to S830, the seventh and eighth mini character images are not erased, and the two mini character images remain unchanged.

When the mini character suggestive effect H is determined, for example, even if the operation of the seventh push button 31B is detected, the seventh and eighth mini character images are not deleted, and the eighth push button 31B is deleted. The seventh and eighth mini character images may be erased at the same time based on the detection of the operation. In this case, when the mini character suggestive effect G is determined, for example, after the seventh mini character image is deleted based on the detection of the operation of the push button 31B for the seventh time, the push button 31B for the eighth time is deleted. Even if the operation is detected, the eighth mini character image may not be erased, and control may be performed so that one mini character image remains.

In this example, the pushbutton 31B is configured to be operated 7 or 8 times at the maximum in the suggestion of the mini character, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in the mini character suggestive effect, the push button 31B may be configured to be operated 5 or 6 times at maximum, or may be configured to be operated 9 times or more, and various modes are possible.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a fluctuation display accompanied by pseudo-relation and the start timing of re-fluctuation is reached (step 047IWS831). Whether or not it is the re-variation start timing can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variation time timer set in step 047IWS415 of the variable display start setting process. If it is not the re-change start timing, the process proceeds to step 047IWS839.

If it is the start timing of the re-fluctuation, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the mini-character suggestive effect at the re-variation to be started this time (step 047IWS832). If the execution of the mini character suggestive effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display eight mini character images (step 047IWS833). In this case, after the re-changing is started, the display of the eight mini-character images is started based on the start timing of the mini-character suggestion effect, and the execution of the mini-character suggestion effect is controlled. Good. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the value of the operation number counter to 0 (step 047IWS834).

By executing the processing of steps 047IWS831 to S834, in this example, in the variable display accompanied by the pseudo-relation, it is possible to newly start the mini-character suggestive effect for each re-change, and the value of the operation number counter is reset. Counting of the number of operations of the push button 31B is started from the state where the number of operations of the push button 31B is 0.

Even when the mini-character suggestive effect is executed for each re-change, the value of the operation number counter may not be reset at the time of re-change. That is, even in the case where the mini character suggestive effect can be executed for each variation of the pseudo-players, the push button 31B can be pressed up to 7 times from the start of the variation display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed. Alternatively, the detection may be performed up to eight times.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the notice restriction flag is set (step 047IWS835). If the advance notice restriction flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the advance notice restriction flag (step 047IWS836) and switches to process data according to the blackout advance notice effect (step 047IWS837). Then, CPU 120 for effect control restarts the process timer (step 047IWS838). After that, the process of step 047IWS805 is executed according to the process data switched in step 047IWS837, so that the blackout notice effect is executed at the start of the re-variation.

In this example, as described above, when the setting change suggestion effect is executed when the execution of the blackout notice effect is decided, the execution of the blackout notice effect is restricted (step 047IWS406-). By executing the processes of steps 047IWS835 to S838, it is possible to execute the limited blackout notice effect at the start of the re-variation.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the button notice effect executing flag indicating that the button notice effect is being executed is set (step 047IWS839). If the button advance notice effect in-execution flag is not set (that is, if the button advance notice effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the button advance notice effect (step 047IWS840). ). Whether or not it is the start timing of the button advance notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 047IWS415 of the variable display start setting process.

If it is the start timing of the button advance notice effect, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform an operation promotion display for prompting the operation of the push button 31B (in other words, the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Is displayed) is displayed (step 047IWS841). In this case, for example, as the operation prompting display, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as "press the button!" or an image simulating the push button 31B. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the button advance notice effect executing flag (step 047IWS842). Then, the process proceeds to step 047IWS848.

In this example, in addition to the button advance notice effect, the effect accompanied by the operation of the push button 31 is executed in the mini-character suggestion effect as well, but unlike the button advance effect, the mini-character suggestive effect is similar to step 047IWS841. No processing is executed and the operation prompting display is not displayed.

If the button advance notice effect in-execution flag is set (that is, if the button advance notice effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 120 detects whether or not the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input (step 047IWS843). If the push operation of the push button 31B is not detected, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the button notice effect (step 047IWS844). Whether or not it is the end timing of the button advance notice effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 047IWS415 of the variable display start setting process.

If the push operation of the push button 31B is detected (Y of step 047IWS843) or the end timing of the button notice effect is reached (Y of step 047IWS844), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 of the notice. The display is controlled to be displayed (step 047IWS845). In this case, for example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a character display such as “chance” or “heat” or to display a predetermined character image, and control that suggests the possibility of a big hit. To do. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to erase the operation promotion display displayed on the image display device 5 (step 047IWS846). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 resets the button notice effect executing flag (step 047IWS847).

It should be noted that, in this example, the case where the notice display is displayed based on the operation of the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the button notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a button notice that displays a notice display only when the push button 31B is operated not only during the operation valid period but also when the push button 31B is successfully operated at a specific timing during the operation valid period. You may comprise so that performance may be performed. In this case, for example, in the image display device 5, as an operation prompting display, an image simulating the push button 31B is displayed and a gauge display is performed, and the push button 31B is operated at the timing when the gauge level reaches a specific level. In some cases, the notice display may be displayed.

Further, for example, the above configuration may be applied to the setting suggestion effect, and the effect indicating the setting value may be executed only when the push button 31B is successfully operated at a specific timing.

Further, in this example, the mini character suggestion effect and the button notice effect are configured to be executable as an effect accompanied by the operation of the push button 31B, but the mini character suggestion effect and the button notice effect are simultaneously executed in duplicate. It may be configured as possible. In this case, for example, a single operation of the push button 31B may be configured to execute the effect as if it was operated for both the mini character suggestion effect and the button notice effect. For example, one mini character image may be erased by one operation, and a notice display of a button notice effect may be displayed.

Further, in this example, the processing of step 047IWS844 is executed, so that even if the push button 31B is not operated when the button advance notice effect is executed, the advance notice display is displayed when the operation valid period elapses. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the advance notice may not be displayed unless the push button 31B is operated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 047IWS849) if the variable time timer has timed out (step 047IWS848), and ends the variable display effect effect process.

(Setting change suggestion notification process)
FIG. 8-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change suggestion notification process (step 047IWS209). In the setting change suggestion notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the initial variation completed flag is set (step 047IWS901). If the first-time fluctuation completed flag is set (that is, if the fluctuation display has already been executed at least once after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on), the processing is ended. If the initial variation completed flag is not set (if the variation display is not executed even after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the initialization flag is set. Is confirmed (step 047IWS902). If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if the recovery process has been executed), the process is terminated as it is.

If the initialization flag is set (that is, if the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed), the effect control CPU 120 inputs a detection signal from a touch sensor (not shown). It is confirmed whether or not there is any (step 047IWS903). The touch sensor is a sensor that detects that the player is touching the hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30. If the detection signal from the touch sensor is not input, if the detection signal from the touch sensor that terminates the process is input (that is, if the player is touching the hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30) The production control CPU 120 performs control to output the setting change suggestion notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 047IWS904). For example, control is performed to output a voice such as "Welcome" from the speakers 8L and 8R as the setting change suggestion notification voice.

In this example, as described above, the setting change process may be executed and the setting value may be changed when the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A setting change suggestion effect may be executed. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 047IWS901 to S904, if the setting change suggestion notification sound is output when the variation display has not been executed even once after the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if It is possible to notify that the setting change suggestion effect may be executed in the executed variable display.

In this example, the case where the setting change suggestion notification voice is output as the setting change suggestion notification is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the setting change suggestion effect is executed by displaying an image that can be displayed only when the initialization process is executed in the image display device 5 or by causing the game effect lamp 9 or the LED to emit light in a predetermined pattern. It may be configured so that the possibility of being notified can be notified.

Next, an effect mode of the setting change suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 8-27 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of a variable display of a normal decorative pattern. In addition, FIGS. 8-28 and 8-29 are explanatory diagrams for describing a specific example of the presentation mode of the setting change suggestive presentation. Among these, FIG. 8-28 has shown the specific example of the production mode of setting change suggestive production A. Moreover, FIG. 8-29 has shown the specific example of the production mode of setting change suggestion production B. Note that in FIGS. 8-27 to 8-29, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

First, with reference to FIG. 8-27, a case will be described in which normal variable display of decorative patterns is executed (when the setting change suggesting effect is not executed). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), in the image display device 5, an initial appearance (in this example, as the left middle right decorative design 5L, 5C, 5R) , "123" is displayed (see steps 047IWS309 and S311). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27(A), on the right side of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 047IW001 is provided in which three small symbols corresponding to the left middle right decorative symbol are displayed. Also, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, similar to the decorative pattern, the initial appearance of the small symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols “123”) is displayed.

Next, it is assumed that the start condition of the first variable display is satisfied after the power is turned on, and in the example shown in FIG. 8-27, whether the initialization process (RAM clear process) is not executed when the power is turned on, or the setting change suggestion effect is produced. Shall be decided not to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B), the image display device 5 starts the normal variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27(B), in the small symbol display area 047IW001, the variable display of the small symbols is started in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbols (see step 047IWS207). Then, when the change time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-27(C), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5, and the stop symbol of the small symbol (book) is also displayed in the small symbol display area 047IW001. In the example, a combination of the same symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed.

Next, an effect mode of the setting change suggesting effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in FIG. 8-28(A), in the image display device 5, an initial appearance (in this example, the left middle right decorative pattern 5L, 5C, 5R) , "123" is displayed (see steps 047IWS309 and S311). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-28(A), on the right side of the image display device 5, there is provided a small symbol display area 047IW001 in which three small symbols corresponding to the left middle and right decorative symbols are displayed. Also, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, similar to the decorative pattern, the initial appearance of the small symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols “123”) is displayed.

Next, after the power is turned on, it is assumed that the condition for starting the first variable display is satisfied, and in the example shown in FIG. 8-28, the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is turned on, and the setting change suggestion effect A It shall be decided to carry out. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-28(B), the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R is not immediately started on the image display device 5, but the left-middle-right decorative pattern 5L is displayed. , 5C, 5R are displayed in a vertically vibrating manner, the setting change suggestion effect A is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 8-28(B), even when the decorative symbol is displayed in a vertically oscillating manner, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, the variable display of three small symbols is the same as in the normal time. It is started (see step 047IWS207).

Next, after the setting change suggesting effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-28(C), the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R is started on the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28(C), the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed in the small symbol display area 047IW001 (see step 047IWS207). Then, when the change time elapses, as shown in FIG. 8-28(D), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5, and the stop symbol of the small symbol (book) is also displayed in the small symbol display area 047IW001. In the example, a combination of the same symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed.

Next, an effect mode of the setting change suggesting effect B will be described with reference to FIGS. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 8-29(A), in the image display device 5, an initial appearance (in this example, as left middle and right decorative patterns 5L, 5C, 5R) , "123" is displayed (see steps 047IWS309 and S311). Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(A), on the right side of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 047IW001 is provided in which three small symbols corresponding to the left middle and right decorative symbols are displayed. Also, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, similar to the decorative pattern, the initial appearance of the small symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols “123”) is displayed.

Next, after the power is turned on, it is assumed that the condition for starting the first variable display is satisfied, and in the example shown in FIG. 8-29, the initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed when the power is turned on, and the setting change suggestion effect B is displayed. It shall be decided to execute. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R is not immediately started on the image display device 5, but the left-middle-right decorative pattern 5L is displayed. , 5C and 5R are vertically vibrated and displayed, the setting change suggestion effect B is executed. Further, when the setting change suggesting effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the effect image 047IW002 is displayed around the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R that are vibrated vertically. Is displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), even when the decorative symbol is displayed in a vertically oscillating manner, in the small symbol display area 047IW001, the variable display of the three small symbols is the same as in the normal time. It is started (see step 047IWS207).

Next, after the setting change suggesting effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, 5R is started on the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-29(C), the variable display of the small symbols is continuously executed in the small symbol display area 047IW001 (see step 047IWS207). Then, when the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 8-29(D), the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5, and the stop symbol of the small symbol (book) is also displayed in the small symbol display area 047IW001. In the example, a combination of the same symbols as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols is derived and displayed.

Next, the presentation mode of the mini character suggestive presentation will be described. FIG. 8-30 and FIG. 8-31 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the mini character suggestive presentation. 8-30 and 8-31, the display screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), (C),....

As shown in FIG. 8-30(A), it is assumed that the variable display of the left middle right decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R is started, and the variable display of the small symbols is started in the small symbol display area 047IW001. When it is decided to execute the mini character suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B), the display of eight mini character images 047IW003 is started on the image display device 5 (see step 047IWS410), and the mini character suggestion is performed. Start execution of production. In this example, a case where the mini-character suggestive effect G or the mini-character suggestive effect H is determined as the type of the mini-character suggestive effect will be described. Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B) and thereafter, a case where the variable display of the decorative design is reduced and displayed at the upper left end portion of the image display device 5 is shown during execution of the mini character suggestive effect. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30(B) and thereafter, the mini-character suggestion effect is an effect accompanied by a push operation by the push button 31B, but as shown in FIG. Unlike, the operation prompting display is not displayed.

Next, when the first push button 31B is pressed during execution of the mini character suggestion effect, the first mini character displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-30(C). The image 047IW003 is deleted (see step 047IWS810). After that, each time the push button 31B is operated, the mini character image 047IW003 is deleted one by one (see steps 047IWS813, S816, S819, S822), and when the sixth push button 31B is pressed, As shown in FIG. 8-30(D), the sixth mini character image 047IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 is erased (see step 047IWS825).

Next, when the push button 31B is pressed the seventh time during execution of the mini-character suggestive effect, if execution of the mini-character suggestive effect G has been decided, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (E1). , The seventh mini character image 047IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted (see step 047IWS828), and only one mini character image 047IW003 is displayed, and the setting value is “6”. Is determined (see FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20).

On the other hand, if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect H is determined when the push button 31B is pressed for the seventh time during the execution of the mini character suggestive effect, it is shown in FIG. 8-31 (E2). As described above, the seventh and eighth mini character images 047IW003 displayed on the image display device 5 are simultaneously deleted (see step 047IWS830), and all the mini character images 047IW003 are deleted, resulting in the super reach effect. Is determined to be executed (see FIGS. 8-17 to 8-20).

8-30 and 8-31 show the case where the mini character suggestion effect G or the mini character suggestion effect H is executed, for example, when the mini character suggestion effect F is executed, FIG. 31(E1) and (E2), even if the push button 31B is pressed the seventh time, the seventh and eighth mini character images 047IW003 are not erased, and FIG. 8-30(D). As shown in, the two mini character images 047IW003 are displayed and remain unchanged.

On the contrary, even if the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect G or the mini-character suggestive effect H is determined, if the push button 31B is not pressed the seventh time, the seventh or eighth The mini character image 047IW003 is not erased, and the state in which two mini character images 047IW003 are displayed remains unchanged as shown in FIG. 8-30(D).

As described above, according to the feature part 047IW, the decoration identification information (for example, the decorative pattern) is variably displayed, and the advantageous state advantageous for the player according to the display result of the variably displayed (for example, the big hit game). State) and can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “6”) having different degrees of advantage for the player. Further, the variable display of the special identification information (for example, a small pattern) can be executed in association with the variable display of the decoration identification information. Further, when the variable display of the decoration identification information is started, the operation mode of the decoration identification information is a special mode different from the normal operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. By setting the decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R to vibrate in the vertical direction), it is possible to execute a setting-related effect (for example, a setting change suggesting effect) that gives a suggestion related to the setting. Further, regardless of whether or not the operation mode of the decoration identification information is the special mode, the variable display of the special identification information is executed by the same operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. Even in the case where the symbols are oscillated in the vertical direction, the variable display of the three small symbols is started in the small symbol display area 047IW001 as in the normal time). Therefore, it is possible to secure the visibility of the special identification information and prevent the effect of the setting-related effect from being lowered. For example, when the decorative design is vibrated vertically and the setting change suggestion effect is executed, if the small design is also vibrated vertically in the same manner, the visibility of the small design is hindered. End up. Therefore, in the characteristic part 047IW, while the decorative design is vibratingly displayed in the vertical direction, the small design is displayed in the same variable manner as in the normal time, thereby ensuring the visibility of the small design and suggesting a setting change. I try not to reduce the performance effect of the performance.

In addition, in this example, the case where the decorative pattern is vibrated and displayed in the vertical direction is shown as a special mode, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a special mode, the decorative design may be displayed in an enlarged manner, an effect image may be displayed around the decorative design, or the effect of the character of the decorative design may be performed. In this way, it is only necessary to display the decorative pattern in some form in a manner different from the normal manner so that the possibility that the setting value has been changed can be suggested.

Further, according to the feature section 047IW, the image display means (for example, the image display device 5) capable of displaying the image is provided. Then, the setting display effect is executed in the image display means. Therefore, the player can be focused on the image display means.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, blackout notice effect) in association with the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information. If the operation mode of the decoration identification information is the special mode, the execution of the specific effect is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the operation of the decoration identification information according to the special mode.

In addition, in this example, the case where the blackout notice effect is executed as the specific effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the specific effect, it is possible to execute an effect such that the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed at the start of the variation, or an effect image is displayed around the decorative pattern. In this way, as the specific effect, if it is executed at the same time, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it difficult to see the vertical vibration display of the decorative pattern in some form.

Further, as a specific effect, not only an effect that hinders the visibility of the decorative pattern, for example, when the fluctuation starts, the lamp or LED of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on or blinks to flash, or a notification sound of a predetermined volume is output. It may be configured to execute a presentation effect. In this way, as the specific effect, an effect in a manner of paying attention to something other than the decorative pattern may be executed.

In addition, even when the effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation, when the effect that does not hinder the visibility of the decorative pattern or when the effect of low volume is executed, even when the setting change suggesting effect is executed at the same time Alternatively, the performance of the effect may not be limited.

Even when the setting change suggesting effect is executed at the start of fluctuation, the effect to be executed at a timing other than the start of fluctuation (for example, during high speed fluctuation or during reach) is not restricted. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when both the execution of the setting change suggestion effect and the execution of the blackout notice effect are determined, a case is shown in which the blackout notice effect is restricted not to be executed at the start of the fluctuation. It is not limited to such a mode. For example, the execution ratio of the blackout notice effect may be reduced in some form, such as by reducing the execution ratio of the blackout notice effect.

Further, according to the feature part 047IW, re-variable display can be executed a predetermined number of times, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display of the decoration identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. (For example, pseudo-run can be performed). Further, after the execution of the specific effect is restricted, the specific effect can be executed when the re-variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the specific effect is not executed.

Further, according to the feature part 047IW, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a setting change suggestion notification) that notifies that the setting-related effect may be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the decoration identification information in advance.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, when the setting value is set to a specific setting value or more (for example, the setting value “4” or more), the operation mode of the decoration identification information is a special mode different from the special mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29(B), the effect image 047IW002 is displayed around the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, and 5R that are vibrated in the vertical direction). (For example, setting change suggestion effect B) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the decoration identification information operates according to the special mode.

In this example, as a special mode, the case where the effect image 047IW002 is displayed around the left, middle, and right decorative designs 5L, 5C, and 5R is shown, but the invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a special mode, the decorative pattern is vibrated with a vibration width larger than that of the special mode, or the decorative pattern is vibrated in a direction different from that of the special mode (for example, left-right direction), which is different from the special mode. You may comprise so that a decorative design may be displayed in a vibration mode.

Further, for example, the setting change suggestive effect B may be executed when the set value is set to "6". In this case, if the setting value is set to "6", the setting change suggestion effect B may be executed with a probability of 100%, or the setting change suggestion effect B may be executed with a predetermined probability by the lottery process. It may be configured to execute. Further, for example, the setting change suggestion effect B may be executed only when a big hit occurs in the first variation display after powering on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As described above, various modes are conceivable as the mode of executing the setting change suggesting effect B.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1") that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit game state) and have different degrees of advantage for the player ~ It can be set to any one of the set values "6"). Further, a detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player is provided, and based on the detection by the detection means, a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character Suggestive production) can be executed. In addition, the effect mode of the predetermined effect includes a special mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect H) that suggests to be controlled in an advantageous state and a specific mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect A to G) that suggests a set value. Including the specific mode, the first suggestive mode (for example, the mini character suggestion productions A to F) that suggests which of the plurality of setting values is set, and the specific setting value (for example, the mini character suggestion effects A to F). , And a second suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestion effect G) that suggests that the set value is set to “6”). Further, when the first condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated once to six times) is established based on the detection by the detection means, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect in the first suggestion mode. When the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated seven times) is established based on the detection by the detection means after the above condition is established, the predetermined effect can be executed by the second suggestion mode. In addition, when the second condition is satisfied while the predetermined condition (for example, the execution of the mini character suggestion effect H is determined) is satisfied, the predetermined effect (for example, the mini character suggestion effect H) can be executed in a special mode. Is. Therefore, even in a situation in which the highly accurate predetermined effect is not executed, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect that can enhance the interest.

In this example, a predetermined effect (in this example, a mini-character suggestion effect) is executed with an operation involving the operation of the push button 31B a plurality of times, and the first operation is performed based on the push button 31B being operated once to six times. Although the case where the second condition is satisfied based on the condition being satisfied and the push button 31B being operated seven times has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute an effect involving a long press operation of the push button 31B in the predetermined effect. In this case, for example, if the push button 31B is continuously pressed for the first period (for example, 10 seconds), the first condition is satisfied, and the second period (for example, 20 seconds) longer than the first period is continued. The second condition may be satisfied if the button is pressed down.

Further, in this example, the case where the predetermined effect (in this example, the mini character suggestion effect) is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, if the predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, or if the cross key or the jog dial is provided, the predetermined effect is executed based on the operation of the cross key or the jog dial. It may be configured. Further, for example, when the infrared sensor or the optical sensor is provided, the predetermined effect may be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the infrared sensor or the optical sensor. It is only necessary to detect the player's action (operation) in some form and execute the predetermined effect.

In addition, in this example, the case where the execution of the mini character suggestion effect H is decided (that is, the setting value is not suggested in the mini character suggestion effect) is shown as the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied. I can't stop. For example, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when attention is paid to a notice effect other than the mini-character suggestion effect, the mini-character suggestion effect may be executed in a mode without suggesting the set value.

Further, in this example, as a case of executing the predetermined effect in a special mode (a mode that does not involve suggestion of which setting value), the case of executing the mini character suggestion effect H of the super reach effect confirmation is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, various modes are conceivable as the predetermined effect that is executed in a mode that does not involve suggestion of which set value, such as executing a pseudo-consecutive confirmation, a big jackpot determination, and an effect in which a change in the active display is determined.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 047IW, it is possible to execute an effective period notification effect (for example, operation promotion display) that notifies that the detection by the detection unit is a valid detection effective period (for example, operation effective period). Also, regarding the detection effective period of the predetermined effect, the effective period notification effect is not executed (for example, in the mini character suggestion effect, the operation promotion display is not displayed). Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player who has performed the operation by noticing that the predetermined effective detection period is in effect.

Further, according to the characteristic portion 047IW, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to the special state (for example, the probability change state) that is easily controlled to the advantageous state. In addition, the execution of the predetermined effect is restricted while being controlled to the special state (for example, the mini character suggestion effect can be executed only when the probability change state is not in effect). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on being controlled in the special state.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute the re-variable display for a predetermined number of times, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed and then the variable display is performed again (for example, , It is possible to run pseudo-ream). Further, for each re-variable display, it is possible to initialize the condition established based on the detection by the detecting means including the first condition and the second condition (for example, the value of the operation number counter is reset every re-variation). .. Therefore, it is possible to execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times from the start of the variable display until the display result is derived and displayed, and the interest for the predetermined effect can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute the re-variable display for a predetermined number of times, after the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed and then the variable display is performed again (for example, , It is possible to run pseudo-ream). Further, the predetermined effect according to the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode can be executed at different ratios according to the number of times of the re-variable display (for example, in the pseudo-player, the mini character executed by the previous change). There is no case where a mini character suggestive effect with low accuracy is executed due to a change after the suggestive effect). Therefore, it is possible to give the player motivation to perform an operation for each revariable display.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, it is possible to execute a special effect (for example, telop suggestion effect) that suggests which setting value and has a mode different from the predetermined effect. Further, in the variable display in which the special effect is executed, at least execution of the predetermined effect according to the second suggestion mode is restricted (see FIG. 8-20). Therefore, it is possible to restrict execution of an effect with an excessively high precision as an effect that suggests which set value. For example, if the highly accurate setting suggestion effect (in this example, the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect G) are executed in a duplicated manner, the player may have an expectation that the setting is excessively high. Therefore, we try to limit such situations.

In this example, the case where the telop suggestive effect is executed as the special effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a special effect, a setting suggestion effect in which a predetermined character appears may be executed, or a setting suggestion effect in which a puzzle is completed may be executed, which is relatively high in some form. Anything that executes the setting suggestion effect may be used.

Further, in the present example, the case has been described in which the high-precision setting suggestion effect is controlled so as not to be duplicated, but not limited to such a mode, for example, conversely, a special effect (for example, telop suggestion effect). Is configured to execute a highly accurate mini character suggestive effect (mini character suggestive effect G in this example) at a high rate, and is configured to increase the player's expectation for a high set value. Good.

In addition to the processing mode shown in this example, for example, the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect may be overlapped in the first place by selectively determining the telop suggestion effect and the mini-character suggestion effect. It may be configured so as not to have.

Further, in this example, the case where the execution of the mini character suggestion effect G is restricted when the execution of the telop suggestion effect is determined is shown. Conversely, the execution of the telop suggestion effect is executed when the execution of the mini character suggestion effect G is determined. May be configured to be restricted.

Further, according to the characteristic part 047IW, a plurality of set values (for example, set value "1") that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, big hit gaming state) and have different degrees of advantage for the player ~ Setting value "6") can be set. In addition, a detection unit (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the motion of the player is provided, and based on the detection by the detection unit, a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character Suggestive production) can be executed. In addition, it is determined whether or not a special condition (for example, that the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is determined) is established, and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is one of a plurality of setting values. A first suggestive mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect A to F) to suggest, and a second suggestive mode to suggest that a specific setting value (for example, a setting value “6”) is set among a plurality of setting values. (For example, a mini character suggestive effect G) is included. Further, when the first condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated once to six times) is established based on the detection by the detection means, the predetermined effect can be executed by the first suggestion mode and the condition determination is performed. When the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated seven times) is satisfied based on the detection by the detecting device after the first condition is satisfied when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied by the means. In addition, the predetermined effect can be executed by the second suggestion mode. If the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied when the condition determining means determines that the special condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed according to the first suggestion mode ( For example, even if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is decided, unless the seventh push button 31B is pressed, the seventh mini character image 047IW003 is not erased and the mini character (Image 047IW003 remains unchanged from the state where two images are displayed). Therefore, a predetermined effect can be executed according to the game situation. That is, according to the game situation, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect so that the effect does not appear to be racing.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the scope of claims for patent, and it is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of claims for patent and all modifications within the scope.

In addition to the game machine of the present invention, a plurality of set values (for example, the set value ", which can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state) and have different degrees of advantage for the player) 1) to a setting value “6”), which is a gaming machine that can be set to any one of the setting values, and can be detected by the detecting means (for example, the push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player and the detecting means. Based on the effect, a predetermined effect (for example, a mini character suggestion effect) can be executed in any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, step 047 IWS409 to S411, S806 to S834 in the effect control CPU 120). And a special condition (for example, that the execution of the mini-character suggestive effect G has been decided) are satisfied (for example, a part for executing step 047IWS827 in the effect control CPU 120). ) And a first suggestion mode (e.g., mini-character suggestive effects A to F) that suggests which setting value among the plurality of setting values is the effect mode of the predetermined effect, and among the plurality of setting values. And a second suggestion mode (for example, a mini character suggestive effect G) that suggests that a specific set value (for example, a set value “6”) is set, and the predetermined effect executing means is based on the detection by the detecting means. When the first condition (for example, the push button 31B is operated 1 to 6 times) is satisfied, the predetermined effect can be executed according to the first suggestive aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts from step 047IWS809). At the same time as executing S825), when the condition determining unit determines that the special condition is satisfied, the second condition (for example, the push button 31B is set to 7 when the second condition is detected based on the detection by the detecting unit after the first condition is satisfied). The predetermined effect can be executed according to the second suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 047IWS826 to S828), and the special condition is satisfied by the condition determining means. When it is determined that the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied, the predetermined effect is executed according to the first suggestion mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 047IWS826). Even if the execution of the mini character suggestive effect G is decided by the execution, if the seventh push button 31B is not pressed, the seventh mini character image 047IW0 is obtained. 03 is not deleted, the mini character image 047IW003 remains displayed in two states), and variable display is executed based on the start condition being satisfied, and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values) are set. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) having a different probability of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) depending on which one of the values 1 to 6) is set. ), and storage means for storing set value information for specifying the set value (for example, RAM 102), and determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the start condition. (For example, CPU 103), numerical data extracting means (for example, CPU 103) for extracting numerical data (for example, MR1) for determining whether or not the determining means controls in an advantageous state, and before determining for the determining means. , An advantageous state is controlled based on the numerical data (for example, MR1) extracted by the numerical data extraction means and a judgment value (for example, a hit/miss judgment table) set according to the set value information stored in the storage means. A determination means (for example, CPU 103) for determining whether or not the setting value information stored in the storage means is specified when determining whether or not the determination means is controlled to an advantageous state, A judgment value is set according to the specified set value information, and it is controlled to the advantageous state when it is determined whether or not the advantageous condition is controlled before the start condition is satisfied and when the start condition is satisfied. A game machine that executes a common determination process depending on whether or not it is determined (for example, executes the same hit/miss determination module in 92FS002 of FIG. 12A and 92FS028 of FIG. 12B).

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in accordance with the game situation. Further, it is possible to preferably perform the determination of the advantageous state when determining the advantageous state in the gaming machine in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set.

A plurality of types of the first condition and the second condition may be set, and the condition for executing the set value suggestion according to the first suggestive aspect and the second suggestive aspect may be changed. For example, the number of push button 31B operations required to satisfy the second condition is selected from 3 to 7 times by lottery or the like, and first in the mini character suggestion effect (FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31). The number of displayed mini-character images (see FIG. 8-30(B)) is reflected in the selection result (for example, among 4 to 8 bodies, 4 bodies if the number of operations is 3 times, 8 bodies if the number of operations is 7 By changing the selection ratio of the required number of operations depending on the set value that is set, the more necessary the set value is for the player, the more necessary the operation for satisfying the second condition. The number of times may be reduced (the number of mini-character images initially displayed may be reduced). By doing so, when the number of operations required to satisfy the second condition is small (when the number of mini-character images displayed first is small), the set value set is advantageous for the player. Since it can be expected that the number of required operations is constant, the interest in the game is improved and the player's willingness to participate in the operation (operation of the push button 31B) can be improved.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect according to the game situation, and it is possible to suitably determine the advantageous state when determining the advantageous state in the gaming machine in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set. As an example of the form of the machine, the variable display is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and the set value is set among a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) depending on which setting value is set. , A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit game state), and storing setting value information for specifying a setting value Means (for example, RAM 102), determination means (for example, CPU 103) that determines whether to control to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and whether or not the determination means controls to the advantageous state. Numerical data extraction means (for example, CPU 103) for extracting numerical data for determination (for example, MR1), numerical data (for example, MR1) extracted by the numerical data extraction means before determination by the determination means, and storage means A determination value set according to the set value information stored in (e.g., a win/loss determination table), and determination means (e.g., CPU 103) for determining whether or not to control in an advantageous state based on the determination value. When determining whether the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state, the setting value information stored in the storage means is specified, the determination value is set according to the specified setting value information, and the start condition is A common determination process is executed when it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before it is satisfied and when it is determined whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the start condition is satisfied ( For example, a gaming machine that executes the same win/fail judgment module in 92FS002 of FIG. 12A and 92FS028 of FIG. Below, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the characteristic part of another embodiment will be described.
(Explanation regarding the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge that constitutes a gaming board surface. Board 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 207SG003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-1, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where the game balls can flow down, and the game board The right side of the image display device 5 in 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hitting) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. The game ball that has been stronger (right-handed) than the game ball that flows down is a game area that flows down through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won in the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot enter the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Has become.

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. The state is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable setting value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) and the like to be described later in the setting value change state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. As will be described later in detail, the setting value change state in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ) Is also.

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the locking switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052 are included. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 closed. By using the frame 207SG003 for gaming machine to open, operation becomes possible. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate case 207SG201 when the main substrate 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of performing variable display of 1 special map, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing variable display of second special symbol, first hold display capable of displaying first reserved memory number 207SG025A, a second holding display 207SG025B capable of displaying the second holding storage number, a normal symbol display 207SG020 capable of executing a variable display of the normal design, a general drawing holding display 207SG025C capable of displaying the general drawing holding storage, In a gaming state in which a round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hitting game (big hitting type) during the big hitting game, a high basing state (time saving state), a big hitting game state, or the like is shot toward the right gaming area 207SG002R. A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 207SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) are collectively arranged.

As shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

When the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is a variable display with two types of big hit symbols (combination of illuminated LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is different from the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, although the big hit symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different. At least a part of the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed and the jackpot pattern that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may overlap.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has LEDs of four segments arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED at the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display are changed in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in accordance with the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage. In part 207SG, the light goes out toward the left).

In the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It is like this. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the left end LED of the first reservation indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Then, the variable display based on the first special figure reservation storage is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are provided three big hit types: a big hit A that is a big hit of 5 rounds, a big hit B that is a big hit of 10 rounds, and a big hit C that is a big hit of 15 rounds. However, which of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

In addition, the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin positions and the effect positions during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

FIG. 9-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-8(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals composing the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-8(A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in, for example, FIG. 9-8(B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ) Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types of big hit types when the variable display result is “big hit”.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that the special winning opening is in the open state to the closed state in the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. When the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted, for example, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has been completed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the confirmation operation of the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 103. It is provided with a random number circuit 104 for performing, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store the variable data, and the CPU 103 writes temporary data to the variable data. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I/O 105. The transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-9, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of these random number values. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

9-10 show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases in which the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the variation display result of "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as the super-reach variation pattern, three or more super-reach variation patterns such as super-reach α and super-reach β as well as super-reach γ... May be provided.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A fluctuation pattern table for storing a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-11(A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-11(B), and FIG. -11 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 9-12 (A) display result determination table (setting value 4), FIG. 9-12 (B) display result determination table ( Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 9-12(C), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-13(A), FIG. 9-13( B) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in, big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, loss variation pattern determination table, public figure display result determination table (not shown), universal figure A fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages. In other words, the set value is 6 which is the largest value, which is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous value the game hall side has. Become.

9-11(A) to 9-11(C) and FIGS. 9-12(A) to 9-12(C) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, determination values are assigned as in the tables shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

9-13(A) and 9-13(B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-13 (A) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. Further, FIG. 9-13(B) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine. In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the judgment values shown in FIG. 9-13 are assigned to each jackpot.

Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low certainty high base state, and the big hit game After the completion, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control are executed, and the big hit B and the big hit C (also called the probability variation big hit) are set so as to shift to the high-accuracy and high-base state.

The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is “big hit” and the variation display result is “small hit” The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined that the variation display result is “miss” is prepared in advance. ing.

In the variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3) are set. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-15(A) and 9-15(B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B and jackpot C. These jackpot variation pattern determination tables (jack jacks) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-16, the variation pattern determination table for loss is used for the loss when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not in the time saving control. The variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern determination table B for loss used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the low base state, and the total pending storage number in the low base state is 5 to 8 A variation pattern determination table for loss C used in a certain case and a variation pattern determination table for loss D used when the game state is a high base state in which time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value in the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can have is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of β-miss as a determination value as shown in FIG. 9-16.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball has passed (entered) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet Hold data of the game (special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. The second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not yet started. The pending data of the figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored.

The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-17A, the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments that draw the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 9-17(B) and FIG. 9-17(C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every out 6000 balls in the full game state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out for the second time, and the normal state (low-probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out for the third time in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in step 3, can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, in order to display "bL." which is an abbreviation of the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 9-19, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L→base 1→base 2→base 3 at intervals of 5 seconds. The display color of each base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to "5" is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 207SG029 is displayed in purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 performing the set value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main processing, the CPU 103 first sets interruption prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, RAM 102 accessible settings, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process to be described later was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred during execution of the setting value changing process). It is determined (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process described later has been executed is executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (whether the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) has been executed) ( 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by a hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the amusement hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, and the pachinko gaming machine is operated while the clear switch is operated. When the machine 1 is activated), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processing of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above is executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. The cold start notification is started by starting the blinking (207SGSa024).

After the execution of 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025) and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to take a timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029) and the interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 informs the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), the fact that power is cut off during setting change described later, and the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processes of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), the processing shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 serve as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a setting value error and recovery from power interruption during setting change. , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-27(B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the power failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of the clerk of the game hall, etc.), and thereby the display monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B to perform the error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the display monitor 207SG029, the first when the abnormal set value is set, or when the power is restored during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are executed to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk at the amusement arcade, etc. generates an error from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and sets the set value. It is possible to recognize that the power was cut off during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the gaming hall, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

In the game control main processing of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Does not determine that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or does not clear the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

FIG. 9-21(A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the flow proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), the Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

In the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area, as shown in FIG. Of these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). At other addresses (F003 and later), special figure holding storage, general figure holding storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. .. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. Further, a value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating a factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

That is, the RAM clear process in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment is a process of storing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in an address excluding the set value.

Note that the characteristic unit 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of this embodiment) may be cleared.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is set in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. Incidentally, when the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 9-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 9-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round display 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 9-6) according to the setting value changing process. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any value 1 to 6 is stored as the setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set to "1" (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any one of 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the operation proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 102 is changed based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. A value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored as the setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value stored in the address F001 is different from the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is stored in the address F000. The data is stored (207SGSa071) and the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. That is, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

Moreover, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 9-27(A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B, nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 9-6) according to the set value confirmation process. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

Thus, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting the blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

In the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the setting value changing process or the setting value confirming process, among the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the setting value changing process or the setting value confirming process. Although the mode in which only one LED is turned on is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting patterns of the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 are jackpot A and jackpot shown in FIG. 9-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is a mode that does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-27(A), at the start of the set value changing process or the set value confirming process, an aspect corresponding to the set value changing process or the set value confirming process is performed. As an example, an example is shown in which the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 light up in the same manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments that make up the round display 207SG131 can change set values. The lights may be turned on in different manners at the start of the process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

As described above, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. By turning on the clear switch and the clear switch, the setting value changing process is executed.

At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 9-17) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the setting value change process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the set value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened. When the clear switch is turned off, the set value confirmation process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 9-25(A), FIG. 9-25(B) and FIG. 9-25(E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 9-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies depending on whether the set value confirmation process is performed at the time of startup and the case where the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for a game.

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the processing is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

The characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention, Included in the invention.

For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary The embodiment is constituted by the symbol display device 207SG020, the universal figure hold display device 207SG025C, the round display device 207SG131, the right hitting lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the set value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). The example in which the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on in the same manner is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. In some cases and when the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be turned on or blinked in different modes. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by turning on all the segments that configure the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state (lighting) Aspect) is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, these first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol It is not necessary to illuminate some of the segments that make up display device 207SG004B.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The example is one in which the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and all of the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are lit. Instead, in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinked, and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are configured. The blinking of all the segments to be performed may not be executed, or only a part thereof may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state is plural. It may be.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be lit or blinked to notify that a setting value error has occurred.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The display monitor 207SG029 may not be provided in the machine 1. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. ..

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization processing is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization processing or a second movable body initialization processing is performed. Although the mode for determining whether or not to execute is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, the round display that constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200 The device 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. may be displayed (lighted or blinked) during the game as long as it can inform that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. ..

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during game" may include different blinking periods, luminance, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control of each movable body and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command The actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitutes the game information display portion 207SG200, The round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are lit or blinked to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, the round indicator 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 may be provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position in the vicinity of the game information display unit 207SG200) to explain that lighting or blinking is performed. By doing in this way, a clerk of the game arcade who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control main processing of the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or while the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed after the flag is cleared is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is performed. Does not determine that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or does not clear the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, but determines that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014 ; Y) may be performed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process described above.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 10-1, the same processes as those in FIG. 9-22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 9-20, the RAM clear process is executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) is executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change process (207SGa013b), no information about the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clearing process is executed after the setting changing process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 9-22 is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or temporary set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 9-22 is executed.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. 10-2, the same processing as that in FIG. 9-23 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 10-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). After that, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 9-23 is executed.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. This game stop end process is the same process as the game stop end process of FIG. 10-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). After that, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 9-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops counting the plurality of timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

The V lid opening time timer controls the gaming state of the V certainty variation after the jackpot game is finished to a certain variation based on passing through a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change) and is controlled to the open state and the closed state. In the V-probable variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. An area in which the V lid is in an open state is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning which determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103, after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state, has passed through a predetermined switch with a game ball (a special winning opening is given when the special winning opening door is about to be closed A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the effective period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. .. The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from the open state of the variable winning ball device 6B to the closed state by the electric Chu opening time timer. ..

The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state is executed after the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect by the fanfare time timer.

The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker release time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is ended. If the attacker release time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011; Y), the operating inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS020), and the process is ended.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power tube opening time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is in operation (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not in operation (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timers are operating (10FS019; Y), the other timers operating are stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other processing (10FS021) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, a process for invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process for invalidating various sensors provided at the starting opening, the general winning opening 10, the out opening, and the passage gate 41, a process for invalidating detection of various errors, The process of invalidating the payout of prize balls is included. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end processing)
Next, a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is ended. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). If the V-lid opening time timer is stopped in 10FS032 (10FS032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the power cable open time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure variation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other processing (10FS041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the hit ball operation handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for enabling the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part 10F)
As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. Of the attacker opening time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmed state, and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the completion, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing this, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the end of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of the V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and the valid period of the electric chewing open time timer And stops the time measurement of the valid period of the power-chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the valid period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display is executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare production is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-1 to FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, Based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. ..

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, the CPU 103 is controlled based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game proceeds by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. This can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 10F)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.

The game machine (so-called first-class game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special pattern and the decorative pattern has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V-winning) in a special winning port (V-winning port), and the first and second types It may be applied to a game machine (one-two mixing machine) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning hole is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening, such as being controlled to the state, is executed. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second type big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that the game balls that have passed the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer are also within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is effectively determined. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting game state in the setting confirming state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 10-1 to 10-4, similar control is executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops timing of various timers based on the setting change state being controlled when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the timing of.

The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in a display error, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. .. In this way, for the big hit display result that is in an advantageous state for the player, the timer is stopped in order to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviated display result is not disadvantaged to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, when the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation, the symbol stop period is started without stopping the timekeeping of the special figure fluctuation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. The characteristic unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise may be generated due to static electricity or the like during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing performed when such an irregular command is received will be described below.

FIG. 11-1 is a diagram exemplifying an effect control command in the characteristic unit 40F in the present embodiment. In FIG. 11A, some of the effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 9-8(A) described above. The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands showing the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not to be a big hit in the winning determination result, and the determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command that indicates a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 11A are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103. By receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on fluctuation pattern designation command)
Based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small design in which the decorative design is reduced corresponding to the variable display of the special design. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variable display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As the variable display symbols, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol next to the normal symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is changing, for example, it is fluctuated by a certain operation in a mode that is always visible in a display device such as the image display device 5. Is displayed. By the variable display of the fourth symbol, an effect such that the effect contents including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment is performed, or the movable body covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display. Based on the reception of the first variation start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(About processing based on the designated command during the opening of the special winning opening)
During the big hit game, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed, for example, 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command.

(Regarding the processing based on the first start mouth winning designation command and the second start mouth winning designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start opening winning award designation command, whereby the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command receiving buffer stored in the RAM 122 stores the second result. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About the processing based on the symbol designating command and variation type designating command)
Based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect or a winning change change effect. The winning flash effect is an effect of causing a lamp provided around the first start opening to emit light when a start winning occurs. The effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the winning flash effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the production control CPU 120 emits red light for those with a high expectation of big hits, and white light for those with a low expectation of hits. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning flash effect. In addition, you may control not to output sound only by light emission.

The winning-time hold change effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning is generated is changed to a mode different from the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for winning change pending effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command or the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of being out of the lottery or out fluctuation without reach. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning pending change effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by a change of hold.

The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect by controlling the light emission of the lamp based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of receiving the symbol designating command or the variation type designating command, thereby executing the winning-pending change production. Only one of the winning flash effect and the winning pending change effect may be executed. In addition, at the time of winning the prize, the effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by outputting the sound.

Next, the effect control main process executed in the characteristic unit 40F will be described. FIG. 11-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 40F. In FIG. 11B, the same processing as that in FIG. In FIG. 11-2, the processes relating to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIG. 9-29 are deleted, and the sub game stop process is added after 207SGS412.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process is executed to inform that the operation is in progress (informing that the setting value is being changed) or that the setting value is being confirmed (informing that the setting value is being confirmed) (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop process, when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the production control CPU 120 stops the game. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 11-3.

After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are received (207SGS416; Y). Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the characteristic unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first variation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby performing the variation display of the decorative pattern by operating the image display device 5 and the variation display of the small symbol at all times. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command has been received. When it is determined that the special winning opening open designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the command for opening the special winning opening is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The CPU 120 for effect control updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 does not display the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. can do. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can prevent the winning-at-end change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. .. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has not been received, the process shifts to 40FS018. If it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can avoid executing the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the winning-pending change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the production control board 12 from a device for sending a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the gaming machine at the time of factory shipment. .. When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

If it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform a predetermined operation based on the reception of the test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 11-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

(About the effect of the characteristic portion 40F)
As shown in FIG. 11C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Does not execute control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 11C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. Does not execute control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 11C, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 11C, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received, the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening designation command even if the special winning opening opening designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command are received, the first starting award winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120, when being controlled to the setting confirmation state, receives the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command, the first starting award winning. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. In this way, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 11-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled in the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

As shown in FIG. 11C, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11B, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting change state is set, and the reception of the setting value confirmation start notification command Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to show that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 11C, the control according to the test command is executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

(Regarding a modified example of the gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 40F)
The characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and the present invention is not limited to modifications and additions without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 40F is demonstrated.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the analysis of the effect control command receiving buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may send an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

In the above-described embodiment, when the control based on the effect control command is not executed even when the effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting check is received when the setting change state or the setting check state is controlled explained. However, the processing based on the reception of the effect control command may be internally executed while the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, the control executed while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of other effect control commands. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, channels other than the channel outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled is executed. However, when the command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may not be analyzed even if the command is received.

In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning are described as the predetermined effect means that is operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any one as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, the operation means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, commands for executing these operations are received during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, a command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You may control not to do it.

In the above-described embodiment, the lamp provided in the gaming machine may be caused to emit light or sound may be output from the speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to the lamp or the speaker is received so that the effect means does not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designating command or the variation type command is executed. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when the command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern is executed. You may make it perform a notice production based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

In the embodiment described above, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation type command being received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various types of advance notices may not be executed by determining that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of determining whether the advance notice is actually executable. In addition, when executing the pre-reading notice production in continuous variable display other than when winning, the notice lottery is executed based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the advance notice, the advance notice may be executed based on the received command.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the process of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). By doing this, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a restriction may be imposed so that another irregular command is not received thereafter. Good.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic parts 092F and 093F)
Next, the characteristic parts 092F and 093F of the present embodiment will be described.

Regarding the characteristic part 092F, the CPU 103 confirms the setting value information in the winning random number determination process (the process executed in the start winning determination process of S101) and the special symbol normal process (S110), and sets the current setting. The win/loss judgment table corresponding to the value is read out, the range of the judgment value is specified from the current game state based on the data of the win/loss judgment table, and the specified judgment value and the random number value MR1 stored in reserve at the time of winning the start prize. An example of determining whether or not a big hit is hit by comparing with will be mainly described.

Regarding the characteristic portion 093F, when storing the set value, the CPU 103 stores and sets a win/loss determination table corresponding to the set value in advance, and a winning random number determination process (a process executed in the start winning determination process of S101). ) And special symbol normal processing (S110), the information of the judgment value in the hit/miss judgment table stored in advance corresponding to the set value is referred to, and based on the data of the hit/miss judgment table, it is judged from the current game state. An example will be mainly described in which the range of values is specified and the specified judgment value is compared with the random number value MR1 stored on hold at the time of winning the start prize to judge whether or not the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, regarding the characteristic portions 092F and 093F, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state before the start condition for the variable display is satisfied, and when the start condition for the variable display is satisfied, the big hit game state is controlled. An example in which common determination processing is executed when determining whether or not to perform is also described.

The main difference between the technique of the characteristic unit 092F and the technique of the characteristic unit 093F is that the set value (the set value 1 to the set value 6 described above) is stored in the hit/miss determination table used by the feature unit 092F to judge a big hit. This is a technique that is selected and used in actual jackpot determination instead of being selected (for example, 207SGSa071). On the other hand, when the set value is stored in the hit/miss determination table used by the feature unit 093F for jackpot determination or the like ( For example, the technology is selected and used in 207 SGSa071).

In the characteristic portions 092F and 093F, a setting will be described as an example in which the jackpot type is selected and determined as one of the “non-probable variation” and the “probable variation”. The jackpot type may be selectable from a combination of a plurality of types different from such a combination of a plurality of types.

Further, in the characteristic portions 092F and 093F, as an example of the process of determining the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol (decorative symbol), the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. An example of executing the process of determining the variation pattern to be executed from will be described.

In addition, in the characteristic parts 092F and 093F, as an example of the process of determining the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol, a random value for determining the variation pattern type and a random value for determining the variation pattern may be provided. Then, the CPU 103 first determines a variation pattern type from a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on the variation pattern type determination random value, and then determines the variation determined based on the variation pattern determination random number value. You may make it perform the process which determines the fluctuation pattern to be performed among the some fluctuation patterns which belong to a pattern classification.

In this embodiment, in the random number determination process (see FIG. 12-1) at the time of winning, the CPU 103 determines that the variable display result is “big hit” based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, based on the occurrence of the start winning. Whether or not it is determined to be “small hit” or whether to be determined to be “small hit”, which type the big hit type is in accordance with the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value for determining the variation pattern. It is determined which of the fluctuation patterns the MR3 becomes a determination value. Then, in the winning random number determination process, a value for designating that the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" or "small hit" in the EXT data of the symbol designating command indicating the result of determination of the kind of big hit, A value for designating a big hit type is set, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control board 12. In the winning random number determination process, the EXT data of the winning variation pattern notification command for notifying the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern determination random value MR3 is added to the random value MR3 as the variation pattern determination result. A value for designating a corresponding variation pattern is set, and control is performed to transmit it to the production control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the big hit type. In addition to being recognizable, the variation pattern can be recognized based on the value set in the winning variation pattern notification command. In the effect control board 12, when the variable display result is specified from the winning variation pattern notification command, the symbol designating command may not be transmitted.

As an example of the symbol designating command, the command C400H is the first symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is “miss”, and the command C401H is the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The second symbol designating command according to, the command C402H is the third symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "uncertain change", and the command C403H has the variable display result of "small". The fourth symbol designating command corresponding to the case of "win". The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the variable display result notification command may be shared.

[Control of the characteristic part 092F]
In the characteristic portion 092F, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process (S110 of FIG. 5, FIG. 12-2) is used to display the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol). Whether to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state as "big hit" or "small hit" is determined. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 at S101 of FIG. By executing the time random value determination process, it is determined whether or not the big hit pattern or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result based on the random value MR1 and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is disturbed. The operation is performed based on the numerical value MR3. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, the special symbol display result becomes "big hit" or "small hit", It is predicted that the variable display mode of the symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side is determined. be able to.

FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S101 of FIG. 15 (hereinafter, “step S” is abbreviated as “S” in FIG. 15) as the winning random number determination processing. is there.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 12-1, the CPU 103 first checks the state of the probability change flag or the like provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like, for example, to check the current game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The state is specified (92FS001). The CPU 103 may specify that the probability variation state is in the on state when the probability variation flag is on.

Subsequent to the processing of 92FS001, a win/loss determination module capable of performing a big hit determination and a small hit determination is executed (92FS002). The success/failure determination module is a subroutine program for making a success/failure determination such as a big hit. Specifically, there are a plurality of win/loss judgment tables based on setting value information that is information about setting values such as a big hit winning probability (big hit probability) and a small hit winning probability (small hit probability) corresponding to the currently stored setting value. This is the process of selecting from the types of tables. Next, based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination module, it is confirmed whether or not the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (92FS003).

If it is not "big hit" in 92FS003 (92FS003; No), it is confirmed whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" based on the judgment result of the hit/miss judgment module (92FS004). When it is not "small hit" in 92FS004 (92FS004; No), the setting for transmitting to the effect control board 12 a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" is made ( 92FS005). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”.

When it is "small hit" in 92FS004 (92FS004; Yes), the setting for transmitting the symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" to the effect control board 12 is set. Perform (92FS006). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “03H”. The symbol designating command is based on the judgment result by the hit/miss judgment such as the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment at the time of starting winning, in addition to the judgment result of the hit/miss judgment such as big hit, small hit, and loss, the judgment result of the big hit type Is a command that can indicate.

When it is a big hit in 92FS003 (92FS003; Yes), the big hit type is judged based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type (92FS007). At this time, the CPU 103 corresponds to the starting mouth buffer value which is data capable of distinguishing between the "first special figure" and the "second special figure" when storing the reserved data at the time of winning the start winning. According to the variation special map ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified from the table data forming the jackpot type determination table Select the jackpot type determination table data corresponding to the special drawing. The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referred to for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types such as "non-probable variation" and "probable variation" based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. The table data corresponding to "1 special figure" and the table data corresponding to "2nd special figure" are provided, and the fluctuation special figure (variable display which is specified corresponding to the starting port buffer value is specified. ), one of the data tables is selected and used for the jackpot type determination.

Next, the setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the determination result by the process of 92FS007 to the effect control board 12 is performed (92FS008). As an example, when it is determined in 92FS008 that the jackpot type is determined to be a "probable variation" jackpot, the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to "01H", and the jackpot type is determined to be a "non-probable variation" jackpot. When it is determined, the EXT data in the symbol designating command may be set to "02H".

After performing any one of the processing of 92FS005, 92FS006, and 92FS008, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is read from the reserved data, and is provided to select and determine the variation pattern to be executed from the plurality of types of variation patterns. The fluctuation pattern determination table is used to determine (determine) a fluctuation pattern according to the read numerical data of the random number value MR3 (92FS009). Then, the setting for transmitting the winning variation pattern designating command that designates the variation pattern according to the determination result by 92FS009 to the effect control board 12 is performed (92FS010).

12-2 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 12-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is “0” (92FS020). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 92FS020, the second reserved storage number count value (count value of the counter for counting the second reserved storage number) stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and the read value is "0". It may be determined whether or not.

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in 92FS020 (92FS020; No), as the reservation data stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (92FS021). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, by being stored in a random number buffer for fluctuations provided in the RAM 102. In the second special figure pending storage unit, pending numbers “1” to “4” are assigned in order from the oldest data to a maximum of four pending data. In this case, the pending data with the pending number “1” is the oldest data, and is the data to be used for the new variable display.

Following the processing of 92FS021, the second special figure reserved storage number is decremented by 1 by updating the second reserved storage number count value by one, and the second special figure reserved storage section is updated. In, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reserved number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reserved numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( 92FS022). Further, in the processing of 92FS022, the total reserved storage number count value stored by the total reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the total number of reserved storages of the first special diagram and the second special diagram) in the game control counter setting unit. May be updated by subtracting 1. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value (which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer) capable of specifying which of the first special figure and the second special figure the special figure to be variably displayed is "2. (92FS023).

When the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in 92FS020 (92FS020; Yes), the first special figure reservation storage number (count value of the counter for counting the first reservation storage number) is "0". It is determined whether or not (92FS024). The 1st special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure with 1st special design indicator 4A. For example, in the process of 92FS024, the game control counter setting unit may read the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determine whether or not the read value is "0". .. As described above, the process of 92FS024 is executed when it is determined in 92FS020 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and whether the first special figure pending storage number is "0" or not. Determine whether. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It is only necessary to decide whether to do it.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in 92FS024 (92FS024; No), as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1", Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (92FS025). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a fluctuation random number buffer of the RAM 122 and temporarily stored. In the first special figure pending storage unit, pending numbers “1” to “4” are assigned in order from the oldest data to a maximum of four pending data. In this case, the pending data with the pending number “1” is the oldest data, and is the data to be used for the new variable display.

Following the processing of 92FS025, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the first reserved storage number count value, and the first special figure reserved storage section is updated. In, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reserved number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reserved numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry ( 92FS026). Further, in the process of 92FS026, even if the game control counter setting unit is updated so as to subtract 1 from the total reserved storage number count value stored by the total reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the total number of reserved storages). Good. At this time, the variable special map designation buffer value is updated to "1" (92FS027).

After performing any of the processes of 92FS023 and 92FS027, a win/loss judgment for a big hit and a win/no hit judgment for a small hit are made by selecting a win/loss judgment table from a plurality of types of tables based on the current set value information. It is possible to execute the success/failure determination module similar to 92FS002 (92FS028).

Then, based on the judgment result of the hit/miss judgment module, it is confirmed whether or not the special figure display result is judged as "big hit" (92FS029). Then, when it is a "big hit" in 92FS029 (92FS029; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the ON state (92FS030). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. Then, the big hit type determining table data corresponding to the variation special figure is selected from the table data forming the big hit type determining table (92FS031). This big hit type determination table is the same table as the data used in the above-mentioned 92FS007.

Next, by referring to the jackpot type determination table data selected in 92FS031, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be determined (92FS032). Specifically, by referring to the jackpot type determination table, the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determining random number MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to each of the "non-probable variation" and "probable variation" jackpot types. Depending on which of the determined values matches, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types.

By determining the type of big hit in the process of 92FS032, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is either an uncertain variation state or a certain variation state that is more advantageous to the player than the uncertain variation state. Whether to control the state, and the open pattern of the jackpot gaming state will be determined before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (92FS033), the determined jackpot type is stored. Let As an example, if the big hit type is "non-probable change", the big hit type buffer value may be "0", and if it is "probable change", it may be "1".

If it is not "big hit" in 92FS029 (92FS029; No), it is confirmed whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" based on the determination result of the hit/miss determination module (92FS034). Then, when it is a "small hit" (92FS034; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is set to the ON state (92FS035).

If it is not a "small hit" in 92FS034 (92FS034; No), or after performing any of the processing of 92FS033, 92FS035, a pre-determined result of whether or not to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, Furthermore, in accordance with the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state, the fixed special symbol is set (92FS036). As an example, when the special figure display result in 92FS034 is not "small hit", a symbol "-" which is a lost pattern is provided corresponding to the predetermined result that the special figure display result is "miss". The special symbol indicating is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when the special figure display result is "small hit" in 92FS034, the small hit pattern becomes "2" in correspondence with the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is "small hit". The special symbol indicating the number "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. In addition, when the special figure display result in 92FS029 is "big hit", one of the special symbols indicating the numbers "3" and "7" which are big hit symbols, depending on the determination result of the big hit type in 92FS032. , Is set to the fixed special symbol. That is, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "non-probable variation", the special symbol indicating the number "3" which is the normal jackpot symbol among the normally open round jackpot symbols is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, in accordance with the determination result that the jackpot type is "probability variation", a special symbol showing the number "7" which is a probability variation jackpot symbol in the normally open round jackpot symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in 92FS036, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (92FS037), and the special symbol normal process is ended. In 92FS024, if the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (92FS024; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (92FS038), the special symbol normal processing is performed. finish. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing a range of judgment values of random numbers for determining a special figure display result. FIG. 12-3(A) is a diagram showing a range of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value in the set value 1 to the set value 3. FIG. 12-3(B) is a diagram showing the range of the determination value at the low probability and the high probability of the setting value 3. 12C to 12E are diagrams showing other modified examples.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-12 described above, different display result determination tables are used depending on the set values 1 to 6. As shown in the display result determination tables of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-12, the range of the determination value that is the big hit display result differs depending on the set value. In FIG. 12-3(A), among the determination values, the setting values 1 to 3 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12-3(A), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart result is set within the range of 0 to 65535. With the set value 1, the range of 1020 to 1237 of such random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and the range of 65208 to 65535 is set as the small hit determination value. Further, in the installation value 2, the range of 1020 to 1253 of the random value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and the range of 65208 to 65535 is set as the small hit determination value. Further, in the installation value 3, the range of 1020 to 1272 of the random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and the range of 65208 to 65535 is set as the small hit determination value. Judgment values other than the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value are set to be out of alignment.

As shown in FIG. 12-3(A), the judgment value of the big hit is set so that the range increases as the set value becomes higher, but the judgment value of 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit becomes the set value. It is common regardless. The determination value serving as the reference value for such a big hit is not limited to the settings 1 to 3 shown in FIG. Further, the range of the determination value for small hits is common (constant) in all settings, and the determination value of 65208 is set to be the reference value for small hits regardless of the set value.

In this way, since the big hit reference value which is the reference value of the judgment value for making the big hit judgment is common to all the settings, the processing load can be reduced in the hit/miss judgment module that executes the big hit judgment, and the main side The control load can be reduced. Specifically, when the judgment value for the big hit judgment is set in a scattered range, the process for comparing the extracted random number value and the judgment value becomes complicated, but FIG. -3(A), when the range of the judgment value is set, the processing becomes complicated because the judgment values can be continuously compared from the predetermined reference value. It can be prevented.

Next, FIG. 12-3(B) will be described. FIG. 12-3(B) is a diagram for explaining the range of the determination value when the setting value 3 is low and when it is high. As shown in FIG. 9-11 to FIG. 9-12, the range of the determination value which is the big hit display result is different depending on the game state. Specifically, in the low probability such as the normal state or the shortened state, the range of the determination value is narrower than that in the high probability such as the probability variation state. Further, in all settings, the range of set values is smaller at low probability than at high probability.

As shown in FIG. 12-3(B), with the same setting value 3, in the low probability, the range of 1020 to 1272 of the random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and in the high accuracy, 1020 of the random number value MR1. The range from 1348 to 1348 is set as the jackpot determination value. As described above, when the set values are the same, the range of the determination value is different between the low accuracy time and the high accuracy time. However, as shown in FIG. 12-3(B), the determination value that is the jackpot reference value is 1020 and is the same regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced in the hit/miss determination module that performs the big hit determination, and the control load on the main side can be reduced.

FIG. 12-3(C) is a diagram showing a range of determination values in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 12-3(C), in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the range of the big hit determination value is the same, but the range of the small hit determination value is the second special symbol is the second. It may be more than one special symbol. Even if the range of the small hit judgment value is changed, the small hit reference value is 10,000 and is the same regardless of the special symbol.

FIG. 12-3(D) is a diagram showing a range of determination values in the second modified example. As shown in FIG. 12-3(D), the small hit determination value may be set immediately after the range of the large hit determination value. For example, in the setting value 2, the range of 1020 to 1253 of the random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and the range of 1254 to 1581 immediately after that is set as the small hit determination value. Further, in the setting value 3, the range of 1020 to 1272 of the random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and the range of 1273 to 1600 immediately after that is set as the small hit determination value. Even in such a case, the determination value serving as the jackpot reference value is 1020 and is the same regardless of the set value.

FIG. 12-3(E) is a diagram showing a range of determination values in the third modification. As shown in FIG. 12-3(E), when the range of the jackpot determination value is the set value 2, it is set continuously, but when it is the set value 3, it is set to be skipped. Good. For example, in the setting value 2, the range of 1020 to 1253 of the random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, and the range of 1300 to 1627 is set as the small hit determination value. Further, in the setting value 3, the range of 1020 to 1253 of the random number value MR1 is set as the big hit determination value, the space of 1300 to 1627 is set as the small hit determination value, and the space of 60000 to 60019 is the big hit. It is set as a judgment value. Even in such a case, the determination value serving as the jackpot reference value is 1020 and is the same regardless of the set value. Further, the determination value which is the small hit reference value is 1300 and is the same regardless of the set value. Although the jackpot determination value of the set value 2 is used as the reference, the set value 1 is set as the jackpot reference value so that the jackpot determination values other than the set value 2 are set in the scattered range. Good.

In the characteristic parts 092F and 093F, when the hit/miss judgment module as a module (subroutine) for making a big hit judgment as to whether to make a big hit and a small hit judgment as to whether or not to make a small hit is executed , The range of the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value are different based on the set value information as shown in FIG. 12-3(A), and as shown in FIG. A plurality of types of hit/miss judgment tables in which data are set such that the ranges of the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value are different based on the game state such as time are selectively used.

The win/loss determination table is provided with win/loss determination tables corresponding to the set values 1 to 6. Specifically, in the hit/miss determination table corresponding to each set value, data is set such that the ranges of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value are different based on the gaming state. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(B), the hit/miss judgment table in which the judgment value at the time of low probability is set and the hit/miss judgment table in which the judgment value at the time of high probability is set are stored in the hit/miss judgment table of the RAM 102. It is stored in the area.

In the case of the characteristic unit 092F, such a win/fail judgment table is not selected and set in advance when the set value is stored, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. A table corresponding to the current set value is selected from the judgment table storage area and used for the judgment of success or failure. On the other hand, in the case of the characteristic unit 093F, such a win/loss determination table is selected in advance from the win/loss determination table storage area of the RAM 102 when a set value is stored, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, for storing a set value. Then, the table that is stored and set in the use table storage area of the RAM 102 and that is stored and set in advance is used at the time of actual execution of the hit determination.

FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing an example of processing of the hit/miss determination module executed by the feature unit 092F in 92FS002 of FIG. 12-1 and 92FS028 of FIG. 12-2.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, common processing (judgment processing) is executed in the win/fail judgment module executed in 92FS002 of FIG. 12-1 and 92FS028 of FIG. 12-2. The CPU 103 can specify the set value information at the time of winning/deciding determination with respect to the setting value information as the setting value information such as the winning probability of the big hit and the winning probability of the small hit, each time the winning/missing judgment is executed by the winning/damaging judgment module. In order to refer to the data as the “setting value information at the time of the last hit determination” at the time of the next hit determination, the previous storage of the RAM 102 in the mode of updating each time as the data of the “set value information at the last hit determination” Store in the area.

In the win/fail judgment module, first, the set value information set when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started and stored in the RAM 102 is read as the set value information of this time, and the previous value stored in the previous storage area as described above. The set value that determines whether or not the set value information this time is the same as the set value information at the time of the previous hit determination by reading the set value information at the time of hit determination and checking whether they match. Information matching is determined (92FS050). As described above, every time the variable display is executed, it is checked whether or not the set value information of this time is the same as the set value information at the time of the hit determination in the previous time. Such setting value information determination is performed, for example, in a gaming shop in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, various noises are generated, and due to such noises, the normal setting stored at the time of startup is stored. The value information data may be broken and changed to abnormal setting value information data, or the area itself storing the setting value information may be physically damaged and normal data may not be stored. For the reason.

If the set value information is not the same in the 92FS050 set value information match determination, the set value information is abnormal, and thus the set value error information, which can specify that the set value is abnormal, can be specified. A command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (92FS055). Then, the process of stopping the game is performed by stopping the progress of the game control currently being executed (for example, stopping the game control program) (92FS056), and the process is ended. This makes it impossible to continue the game. When the production control board 12 receives a command capable of specifying the setting value abnormality error information, it executes an error-related process such as a process of displaying error information notifying that the setting value is abnormal.

After the game is stopped by 92FS056 and the game is stopped, if you want to play the game again on the pachinko gaming machine 1, turn off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 once, then turn it on and restart it. At this time, if the above-mentioned setting change processing is not executed, the game stopped state may not be resolved.

On the other hand, when the setting value information is the same in the setting value information matching determination of 92FS050, the setting value information is normal, and as described above, a plurality of types of hit/miss determination tables are provided according to the setting value information and the gaming state. From among the above, a win/loss determination table (low probability probability determination table and high probability probability determination table) corresponding to the current setting value that can be specified by the setting value information is selected and read (92FS051).

Then, based on the data of the read hit determination table, from the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), for each of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value, from the common reference value as described above. The range of the judgment value (the range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value) is specified (92FS052). For example, when the current gaming state is a high-probability state, a high-probability time hit/miss determination table is selected, and the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are specified from the table. As the hit/miss determination table, for example, the display result determination table according to the set values shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 described above may be used.

Next, by comparing the numerical data of the random number value MR1 read in the winning random number determination process or the special symbol normal process with the range of the determination value from the common reference value specified in 92FS052, the big hit determination is made. And it is determined whether or not the small hit is determined (92FS053). Specifically, when the numerical value data of the random number value MR1 matches the numerical value data within the range of the jackpot determination value, it is determined to be a big hit, and the numerical value data of the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination value. If it coincides with the data, it is determined to be a small hit, and if the numerical data of the random number value MR1 coincides with the numerical data within the range of the big hit judgment value and the range other than the range of the small hit judgment value, it will be lost. Make a decision. Then, the determination result of the win/no determination in 92FS053 is output to the winning random number determination process of the calling source or the special symbol normal process (92FS054), and the process ends.

Such a win/loss determination module is executed as a process common to the winning random number determination process of FIG. 12-1 and the special symbol normal process of FIG. 12-2, and the win/loss determination table provided in common is set. The big hit determination and the small hit determination can be executed by selectively using the value information and the current game state.

[Control of Characteristic Section 093F]
The control of the characteristic part 093F is different from the control of the characteristic part 092F in the following points.

At the step of 207SGSa071 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 9-22, the table used for the hit/miss judgment is preselected and read out from the hit/miss judgment table storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the set value stored, and the RAM 102 is used. It is stored and set in the table storage area. The control of the characteristic part 093F is one of the processing contents of the winning/discarding determination modules (92FS002, 92FS028) executed as common processing in the winning random number determination processing of FIG. 12-1 and the special symbol normal processing of FIG. 12-2. The part is different from the control of the characteristic part 092F. Specifically, the win/loss determination table used for win/loss determination in the win/loss determination module is read out from the win/loss determination table stored in the use table storage area during the setting change processing of the set value as described above, It is used for judging whether or not it is true.

In the control of the characteristic part 093F, the flow of the winning random number determination process of FIG. 12-1 and the special symbol normal process of FIG. 12-2 is the same as the control of the characteristic part 093F. Then, in the control of the characteristic part 093F, the processing contents of the win/fail judgment module executed in 92FS002 and 92FS028 are partly different from the control of the characteristic part 092F as shown in FIG. 12-5.

FIG. 12-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing of the hit/miss determination module by the characteristic unit 093F. In the win/loss determination module of FIG. 12-5, the processes corresponding to 92FS050 to 92FS056 of the win/loss determination module of FIG. 12-4 are shown as 93FS001 to 93FS007. The win/loss determination module of FIG. 12-5 differs from the win/loss determination module of FIG. 12-4 in the processing of 93FS002.

In 93F002, as described above, the win/loss determination table (low probability win/fail determination at the low probability) selected and corresponding to the set value in the setting value changing process (207SGSa071) of FIG. The table and the high probability time judgment table) are read. As the hit/miss determination table, for example, the display result determination table according to the set values shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12 described above may be used. In this way, based on the read data of the hit/miss determination table, from the current game state (low probability state or high probability state), the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value are common as described above. The process of specifying the range of the judgment value (the range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value) from the reference value of is executed (93FS003). The other processes are the same as those of the winning/defective judging module of FIG. 12-4.

In the characteristic part 93F, during the setting value changing process of FIG. 9-22 (207SGSa071), the data of the hit/miss judgment table itself is stored corresponding to the set value, and then the hit/fail judgment table is set in the hit/miss judgment module. An example is shown in which the data is read and used for the judgment of success or failure. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of the setting value change processing of FIG. 9-22 (207SGSa071), the data of the hit/miss determination table itself is not stored corresponding to the setting value, but the hit/fail determination table corresponding to the setting value is specified. The hit/failure determination table identification information (for example, table number designation information) for storing is stored, and then, in the hit/disapproval determination module, the data of the hit/loss determination table itself is selected based on the stored hit/miss determination table identification information. Alternatively, the data may be read out and used for the success/failure determination.

[Main Configurations and Effects of Characteristic Parts 092F and 093F]
Next, main configurations and effects of the above-mentioned characteristic portions 092F and 093F will be described.

[1] In the characteristic unit 092F, a pachinko gaming machine that stores setting value information for specifying which of the setting values 1 to 6 is, 92FS002 of FIG. 12-1, 92FS028 of FIG. 12-1, and FIG. -4, 92FS050 to 92FS053, etc., in the winning random number determination process and the special symbol normal process, the setting value information is confirmed, and the determination table corresponding to the current setting value is read, and the determination table Based on the data, the range of the judgment value is specified from the current game state, and the specified judgment value is compared with the random number value MR1 which is reserved and stored at the time of winning the start prize, thereby determining whether or not the jackpot is a big hit. Thereby, when the big hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set, the big hit game state can be appropriately determined. For example, when making a judgment of success or failure, by setting the judgment value by checking the setting value information every time, and comparing the judgment value setting without checking the setting value information each time The safety of can be guaranteed. Also, when it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled before the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game like the winning random number determination processing is established, the special symbol normal processing is performed. A common determination process is executed when it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the variable display start condition of the game is satisfied. This can reduce the processing load when determining a big hit.

[2] The characteristic unit 093F is a pachinko gaming machine that stores determination value information such as a hit/miss determination table corresponding to the setting value based on the setting value being set to any one of the setting values 1 to 6, At the time of storing the set value, a win/loss determination table corresponding to the set value is stored and set in advance, and as shown in 92FS002 of FIG. 12-1, 92FS028 of FIG. 12-1, 93FS001 to 93FS004 of FIG. In the winning random number determination process and the special symbol normal process, reference is made to the determination value information stored in the determination table stored in advance corresponding to the set value, and based on the data of the determination table, the current gaming state. The range of the judgment value is specified from, and the specified judgment value is compared with the random number value MR1 held and stored at the time of winning the start prize to judge whether or not the big hit is hit. Thereby, when the big hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set, the big hit game state can be appropriately determined. For example, when making a judgment, it is sufficient to use the judgment table corresponding to the set value in advance to refer to the judgment value information to judge the judgment. Therefore, the setting value information is specified and the corresponding judgment value is set. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to the acceptance/rejection determination as compared with the case of setting and determining the acceptance/rejection. Also, when it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled before the start condition of the variable display of the special figure game like the winning random number determination processing is established, the special symbol normal processing is performed. A common determination process is executed when it is determined whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the variable display start condition of the game is satisfied. This can reduce the processing load when determining a big hit.

[3] As illustrated in FIG. 12-3(A) and the like, the range of the determination value determined by the hit/miss determination module is a range of the determination value from a predetermined reference value (for example, 1020) such as a reference value of a big hit. Is set, and the predetermined reference value (for example, 1020) is common regardless of the set value being one of the set values 1 to 6. This can reduce the processing load when determining a big hit.

[4] As shown in 92FS050 of FIG. 12-4 and 92FS001 of FIG. 12-5, in the hit/miss determination module, whether or not the set value information is the same as the previous set value information is changed, for example, once. A collation unit that collates each predetermined period such as each display is provided. Thereby, the accuracy of the setting value information can be ensured. Regarding the matching performed by the matching means for each predetermined period, the “predetermined period” is not limited to one period for each execution of the winning/disapproval determination module (every predetermined period for starting winning, every predetermined period for variable display). For example, it may be a period for each real time such as every 30 minutes. Further, the “predetermined period” is not limited to a period for each variable display, but may be a period for each multiple variable display such as every 30 variable displays.

[5] As shown in 92FS050 of FIG. 12-4 and 92FS001 of FIG. 12-5, in the matching means of [3], the numerical data of the numerical data MR1 extracted by the starting winning determination process (S101) is a big hit game state. 12-4 and 12-5, the setting value information is collated every time the determination is made by the determination module of FIGS. 12-4 and 12-5. Thereby, the accuracy of the setting value information can be ensured.

[6] In collation of the set value information in the hit/miss determination module, if the set value information does not match the previous time and the present time, as shown in 92FS055 of FIG. 12-4 and 92FS006 of FIG. 12-5, the set value is abnormal. An error-related process such as a process of transmitting a command capable of specifying error information from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 and displaying error information indicating that the set value is abnormal on the effect control board 12 side. Execute. As a result, the fact that the setting value information is inaccurate is notified by an error notification, whereby the accuracy of the setting value information can be ensured.

[7] In collation of the set value information in the hit/miss determination module, if the set value information does not match the previous time and the present time, as shown in 92FS055 of FIG. 12-4 and 92FS006 of FIG. A command capable of specifying information is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, and the effect control board 12 executes error-related processing such as processing for displaying error information notifying that the set value is abnormal. To do. Further, on the main board 11 side, as shown in 92FS056 of FIG. 12-4 and 92FS007 of FIG. 12-5, the game is stopped so that the game cannot be continued. As a result, the big hit is not determined based on the abnormal set value information, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

[8] As shown in FIG. 12-3(A), the range of the judgment value of the numerical data controlled in the small hitting game state is constant regardless of the set value, and the hit/miss judgment module (93FS053 in FIG. 12-4). , 93FS004 of FIG. 12-5) determines whether or not there is numerical data controlled in the small hitting gaming state within a range of a certain determination value. As a result, the processing for determining the small hit can be shared regardless of the set value, and the processing load can be reduced.

[9] In the characteristic unit 093F, in the step 207SGSa072 of the setting value change processing in which the setting value can be changed, the setting value information is stored together with the hit/miss determination table. This makes it possible to suitably perform the big hit determination when the big hit determination is made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the setting values of a plurality of stages are set.

[Main Modifications of Characteristic Parts 092F and 093F]
[1] In the characteristic unit 093F, in the step of 207SGSa071 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 9-22, the hit/miss determination table is previously stored in the RAM 102 in correspondence with the stored setting value information. An example has been shown in which it is selected, read, and stored and set in the use table storage area of the RAM 102. However, without being limited to this, the information of the setting value may be stored, and the information of the hit/miss determination table corresponding to the setting value may be stored.

[2] As shown in FIG. 12-3, the range of the judgment value judged by the hit/miss judgment module is, for example, common data starting from a predetermined reference value (for example, 1020) and the positive direction (the numerical value increases). An example is shown in which the data range of the judgment value is set in (direction). However, not limited to this, the range of the judgment value judged by the hit/miss judgment module is, for example, a predetermined reference value (for example, 1300) as common data as the end data, and the judgment value in the opposite direction (direction in which the numerical value decreases). The data range may be set.

[3] The setting value information matching determinations shown in 92FS050 of FIG. 12-4 and 92FS001 of FIG. 12-5 need not be executed for the hit/miss determination modules of FIGS. 12-4 and 12-5.

[4] Regarding the win/loss judgment modules of FIGS. 12-4 and 12-5, when the setting change process is executed, setting value information and a hit/miss judgment table corresponding to the set values are stored in advance and the win/fail judgment module is set. When executing, based on the stored setting value information, the consistency judgment table whether or not the judgment table corresponds to the setting value is confirmed, and the judgment table for which the consistency can be confirmed May be used to determine whether or not it is true or false. By doing so, it is possible to increase the safety (validity) of the judgment in the case of making a judgment as to whether or not it is true.

[5] Regarding the processing of the win/loss determination module shown in FIG. 12-5, the table number data given to the win/loss determination table read in 93FS002 is separately stored in a storage area, and the table number data is compared to obtain the table. It may be determined whether or not the setting value information is abnormal based on whether or not the numbers are the same. In that case, the set value information is not compared in 93FS001.

[6] In the characteristic part 093F, it is determined that the advantageous state corresponding to at least the set value is controlled based on the setting to any set value (for example, any of the set values 1 to 6). A storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) for storing the judgment value information (for example, the hit/miss judgment table) is provided. Other information such as set value information stored separately from the win/loss judgment table in the set value change processing of FIG. 9-22 is also stored in the storage means in addition to the judgment value information of the win/no judgment table. You may do it.

[7] When making a judgment on the judgment in the judgment module, in order to confirm the consistency between the setting value information and the judgment table, both the setting value information and the information in the judgment table are used to judge the judgment. You may make it perform the process which does. If such a process is executed, the processing load is slightly increased, but it is possible to ensure the consistency of the information used for the judgment of success or failure.

(Explanation regarding the association of the characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic portion. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature parts.

The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize hole 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary pattern display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23... Count switch 30... Ball hitting handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage to the player,
A detection means capable of detecting the movement of the player,
Based on the detection by the detection means, a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes,
And a condition determining means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a first suggestion mode that suggests which setting value among a plurality of setting values, and a first suggestion mode that suggests that a specific setting value among the plurality of setting values is set. Including two suggested aspects,
The predetermined effect execution means,
When the first condition is satisfied based on the detection by the detection means, the predetermined effect can be executed according to the first suggestion mode, and
When the second condition is satisfied based on the detection by the detecting device after the first condition is satisfied when the condition determining device determines that the special condition is satisfied, the second suggestion mode It is possible to execute the predetermined effect by
When the first condition is satisfied but the second condition is not satisfied when it is determined by the condition determination means that the special condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect according to the first suggestion mode And then
The variable display is executed based on that the start condition is satisfied, and the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on which of the plurality of setting values is set,
Storage means for storing setting value information for specifying the setting value;
Determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the satisfaction of the start condition,
Numerical data extraction means for extracting numerical data for determining whether or not the determination means controls to the advantageous state,
Before the determination of the determination means, the advantageous state is controlled based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means and the determination value set according to the set value information stored in the storage means. And a determination means for determining whether or not
When determining whether the determination means is controlled to the advantageous state, the setting value information stored in the storage means is specified, and the determination value is set according to the specified setting value information,
Common when determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the start condition is satisfied and when determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled when the start condition is satisfied The judgment process of
A gaming machine characterized by that.